1 Event Log Entries PDF

MPK 40 / 400
System documentation
 KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 28.11.2011 / DO_DBlatt4dh_GB

Contents
Version Chapter
Instruction 04.06.2010 I / 1 ...
Event log entries 17.06.2011 I – A / 1 ...
Operation status 17.06.2011 I – B / 1 ...
Function list 07.09.2006 II / 1 ...
MPK 40 / List of functions LIFT4D 2.07 II – A / 1 ...
MPK 400 / List of functions LIFT4H 2.39 II – B / 1 ...
Technical description 28.11.2011 III / 1 ...
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC) 14.12.2007 IV / 1 ...
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS) 14.12.2007 V / 1 ...
2 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Kollmorgen Lift Controls Ltd.

Broichstraße 32 Unit 2, The Office Village
D-51109 Cologne Chester Business Park
Phone: +49 (0) 221 89 85 0 Chester, Cheshire, CH4 9QP
Fax: +49 (0) 221 89 85 30 Telephone + 44 (0) 1244-67 85 49
http://www.kollmorgen.de Fax +44 (0) 1244-68 15 78
E-mail: info@kollmorgen.de Email info@kollmorgen.co.uk
KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 04.06.2010 / DO_AN4DH_GB

MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
Contents
1 Users guide to the display and menu structure...........................................................3
1.1 Function of the push buttons and menu structure.............................................................. 3
1.2 Structure of the Kollmorgen-Menu....................................................................................... 3
1.3 Defining the location indicator in the fl. modules ETGM24 / ETGB004 (MPK 400).............. 4
1.4 Access Management ............................................................................................................ 6
1.5 Input-field for test calls ........................................................................................................ 7
1.6 Free programmable terminals (BST / Net)............................................................................ 7
1.6.1 MPK 40 (BST) ................................................................................................................. 7
1.6.2 MPK 400 (BST) ............................................................................................................... 8
1.6.3 MPK 40 (Net) .................................................................................................................. 9
1.6.4 MPK 400 (Net)................................................................................................................. 9
1.6.5 Identification of the module-terminals ETG-B004 V3 (MPK 400) in the menu ................... 10
2 LED – indicators on the front panel............................................................................11
3 Help by faults...............................................................................................................12
3.1 Function <<Event log>> ..................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Function <<Operational status>>....................................................................................... 12
3.3 Function <<Test module>>................................................................................................. 13
3.3.1 Address-set-up BST-inputs ............................................................................................ 15
3.3.2 Address-set-up BST-outputs .......................................................................................... 16
3.3.3 MPK 400: Address-set-up extension modules................................................................. 16
3.3.4 MPK 400: Address-set-up FKI with IM40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12 ................................... 17
3.3.5 MPK 400: Address-set-up FKP ...................................................................................... 18
3.3.6 MPK 40: A.-set-up of the modules: FKF40 with IM 40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12, WFA 40 .. 19
3.4 Function <<Group members>> .......................................................................................... 20
3.5 Function <<Module list>>................................................................................................... 20
4 Menu <<Testing / Maintenance>> (MPK 40 / 400) ......................................................21
4.1 Menu structure and presettings ......................................................................................... 21
4.2 Overview of the testing travels .......................................................................................... 22
4.3 Function <<Start-, journey-, braking time monitor>>......................................................... 23
4.4 Function <<Reset travel monitor error>>........................................................................... 23
4.5 Function <<Speed monitoring>>........................................................................................ 23
4.6 Function <<Door control>> ................................................................................................ 23
4.7 Function <<Set call>>......................................................................................................... 23
I/2 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
1 Users guide to the display and menu structure

1.1 Function of the push buttons and menu structure
Function of the push buttons User guide of the display
Mainmenu Structure
Mainmenu Submenu
of the menu
in the display
Function
OK
Submenu Value
ESC
OK Function The following chart shows,
ESC + by a symbol in the top right
corner, which of the R
Back to the normal display
- buttons are currently

OK active.
ESC
OK Description of the 4 symbols:
new value : UP/Down- push buttons are active.

saved ESC
: Plus/Minus- push buttons are active.
new value
not saved
: Further submenus can be selected
by means of the OK- push button.
R : RESET- push button must be operated
before further entries are made.
Attention!: The character "R" in the display shows you, that a

parameter into the basic settings was changed!
1.2 Structure of the Kollmorgen-Menu
Notice: The structure contains all menu functions of MPK40/400. It is possible that not all menu functions are available at your control-
system, because the menu is depended on the parameters in the basic-settings and on the MPK-type!
04.06.2010 I/3
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
1.3 Defining the location indicator in the fl. modules ETGM24 / ETGB004 (MPK 400)
A location indicator must be stored in each module in order to ensure that each module in the network can
be clearly identified. The FKF, IRP and IKL modules are fitted with a pre-set location indicator and are
automatically recognised and activated by the BST. The ETG M24 / ETG B004 modules do not contain a
pre-set location indicator. This means that you will have to define this location indicator using <<Floor
commission>> either when commissioning for the first time or when replacing the component.
1. If all external calls associated with a floor and door side are connected with the lift network via
a separate ETG M24 / ETG B004 module, the following steps need to be performed:
Set <<Floor commission>> to Settings

<<YES>>.
Net installation
Floor commission
YES
Issue an internal call to the floor The car travels to the floor
where you would like to define the requested by the internal
location indicator of the ETG module. call.
Issue an internal call to the floor The acknowledgement light

where the car is now located. for the internal call begins to
flash.
Issue an external call from the floor The acknowledgement light

where the car is now located. for the external call begins
to flash.
Now press the internal call button The acknowledgement

which is flashing. You are now lights for both the internal
defining the location indicator of the and external calls go out.
ETG module.
If the door control system is selective at the floor in question, repeat steps
3 - 5 for the other doorside.
Perform steps 2 - 6 for each floor.
Set <<Floor commission>> to Settings

<<NO>>.
Net installation
Floor commission
NO
If, after performing step 4, the acknowledgement light for the external call does not flash, an external call
to a different floor may already have been issued. To cancel the procedure, issue a car call to any
floor (except the one which is flashing!). Then start again from step 3.
I/4 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
2. In addition to the relationship between modules and external calls associated with a floor as
described under item 1, the following constellations are possible:
External calls associated with several floors / door sides (in the case of selectivity) are connected
to the network via one ETG M24 module.
The ETG M24 module is used for control without external call functionality.
In these cases, the module is furnished with a location indicator by Kollmorgen

Steuerungstechnik GmbH prior to delivery, eliminating the need for adjustment at the
customer's premises. Should such a module need to be replaced subsequently, please
specify the control number when ordering the spare part. The spare module will contain a
matching location indicator. Please contact our customer service department if a defective
module needs to be replaced by one without a location indicator.
Further information on the above type of modules are given in the technical description of the MPK 40/400
unit and in the circuit diagrams.
You delete the location indicator of ETG M24 / ETG B004 –modules with the following steps:
1. turn off the power supply of the module
2. press the micro push button on the module and hold it
3. turn on the power supply
4. relax the micro push button after 3 secounds.
04.06.2010 I/5
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
1.4 Access Management

To protect the control data and settings from unauthorised access entry to the menus can be limited to
those with authority by using a six-digit code. Overall there are seven user levels, levels 1 - 6 being open
to user coded access. Each higher level has more access rights made available. In the default settings
levels 1 - 6 have no access limitations applied. The 7th level is reserved for the control manufacturer.
The following codes are preset:
Level User Code no. Access rights

7 MPK engineer ** ** **
6 Service office 11 22 33
5 Remote interrogation 70 80 90
4 Service engineer 2 40 50 60
3 Service engineer 1 10 20 30
2 Technical engineer 2 01 02 03
1 Technical engineer 1 00 00 00
You can change the preset codes (level 1-6) at the menu <<Code - No. / edit>>!
Examp.: User log on <<Service office>> Examp.: Access blocked for <<Technical engineer 1>> to
main menu <<Basic settings>>
Code - No. Basic settings

user log on
Service - office +
OK
-
1
Code - No. _
+ Basic settings _
+
Service - office
1. Code - No. please Technical engineer 1
11 Yes
+ -
OK -
Code - No. _
+ Basic settings _
+
Service - office
2. Code - No. please Technical engineer 1
** 22 No
+ -
OK OK
Code - No. _
+ Basic settings
Service - office
3. Code - No. please
** ** 33
+ -
OK
Don´t forget it!

Code - No. confirmed Code - No.
Hello User log off
Service - office
user loged in
1 Push this buttons at the same time
Single menu points as well as entire menu trees with their sub-menus (i.e. the <<Basic settings>> menu)
can be blocked in this way. The exceptions to this rule are the menus <<Code - No.>>,
<<User Log On>>, <<User log off>> and <<User Identity>>.
I/6 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
1.5 Input-field for test calls

You find the input-field for test calls under <<See / Give calls / Floor 1 - …>>.
Calls doorside 1 and 2 + Select call type
(2. doorside only by calls fl.: 1- 7 -
selective doors) Handling:
door 1: I I 1.: select call type
2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2.: set target floor
-
door 2: 3. I + 3.: set call
actual level and travel
direction
OK
2. 1.
Call type symbols: : Landing call down; : Landing call up; I: Car call; V: Priority call
1.6 Free programmable terminals (BST / Net)

All free programmable functions can be linked with any of the free programmable inputs and outputs of the
BST and the modules (SLON / GLON) with the aid of this menu.
1.6.1 MPK 40 (BST)
Basic settings Handling:

1.: select function
2.: go to 4. menuline
BST - Input 3.: select terminal
1. 4.: save connection
Fan Push Button 2. 5. 5.: return to 3. menuline
ESC
OK
3.
Input Terminal: E7 + - 4.
OK
Basic settings Basic settings

MPK- control MPK- control
BST- Input BST- Output
Step “5“ is necessary, if you want more new connections. Push the RESET-push button, if all settings
are finished.
04.06.2010 I/7
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
1.6.2 MPK 400 (BST)
BST - Input Handling:

1. 1.: select function
2.: goto 3. menuline
Fan Push Button 2. 7. 3.: select BST or extension module
5. OK
ESC (A10 - A17)
3. -
BST + - IO E7 + 4./5.: select terminal
! 6. ! 7.: return to 2. menuline
Fl.: + - Door: + -
OK
! : this setting is depended on the
function in the 2. menuline
Basic settings Basic settings Basic settings

MPK- control MPK- control MPK- control
BST- Input BST- Output BST- calls
are finished.
BST - Functionset Handling:

1.: select function
1.
2.: goto 3. menuline
Extern. Gong 2. 6. 3.: set values / extension
3. 3. OK ESC module-N0.
+ - 4.: select position
Fl. 1 + - to 6
4. 6.: return to 2. menuline
A12 3. IO 1 - 6 5.
+ - Notice:
OK A12 = Extension module-No. 2
Basic settings
MPK- control
BST- function set
are finished.
I/8 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
1.6.3 MPK 40 (Net)
Net - Input Handling:

1.: select function
1. 2.: goto 3. menuline
2. Fan Push Button 7. 3.: select module
OK ESC
FKF ID: 1 6. E 1 (I) + - (floor, doorside)
OK
! ! ! : this setting is depended on

+ - + - the function in the 2. menuline
Fl.: Door:
4.
5.: select terminal
6.: save connection
7.: return to 2. menuline

Net- input Net- output
are finished.
1.6.4 MPK 400 (Net)
Net - Input Handling:

1.: select function
2. Fan Push Button 7. 3.: select module
OK ESC
3. 5. 4.: goto 4. menuline
FKF 1_0_00 + - 6. IO 4 (C) + - (Grp. No., floor, doorside)
OK
! ! ! ! : this setting is depended on

- - - the function in the 2. menuline
Grp.:* +
Fl.: +
Door: +
4.
5.: select terminal
6.: save connection
7.: return to 2. menuline

Net- input Net- output
are finished.
04.06.2010 I/9
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
1.6.5 Identification of the module-terminals ETG-B004 V3 (MPK 400) in the menu
Terminal description
device MPK-Menu *
C1 1 (C)
C2 2 (C)
C3 3 (X), 4 (O)
IO5 5 (U)
O1 6 (O)
O2 7 (O)
O3 8 (O)
O4 9 (O)
*terminal type: (C) = call (input and output); (X) = call or input; (U) = input or output; (O) = output
I / 10 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
2 LED – indicators on the front panel

Run Is blinking when control is switched on.
Info This LED indicates a fault entry in the event log. LED is not on when the event log only
contains report entries.
Blocked This LED indicates a block of the control. You find the reason of the block in the event log.
Operating voltage
5V The proc. operational voltage is recognised.
U1 The control voltage is recognised.

Safety circuit
U2 The passive safety circuit is closed.
U3 Emergency stop is inactive.
U4 All door contacts are closed.
U5 The car doors are closed.
U6 The lock contact is closed.
Position
Top The input correction TOP is active.
Level The lift is at floor level.
Bottom The input correction BOTTOM is active.
Reversal functions door

Door 1 Rev. “photocell", "door open button" or "pressure contact" are active.
Door 2 Rev. ”photocell", "door open button" or "pressure contact" are active.
Digital selector
DSK Zone Zone signal is active.
DSK Status General status display.
Serial interfaces
TD Chanal sending data.
RD Chanal receiving data.
Net interface
S Data S-Net sends/receives data.
S Active S-Net is active.
G Data G-Net (group) sends/receives data.
G Active G-Net (group) is active.
System The LED flash up when BST 40 is switched on. The LED-flash indicates
the operating of the bus system.
The BST-modules of MPK 40 / 400 do not include all LED-indicators.
04.06.2010 I / 11
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
3 Help by faults
3.1 Function <<Event log>>
1. 6.
Information OK Selector fault
no zone signal
Information 2. Mo. 11.02.02

Fl.: 5
13:45:37
Door: - Travel
Operation status
3. From program version Lift 4H
Information OK 2.10 every event log entry
Event log 5. OK
contains the travel status.
Available are:
Information Event log
Event log Faul. 3 / Mess. 5 <<Stop>>
Display Since delete 8 <<Start>>
Continue with OK
<<Travel>>
<<Deceleration>>
4. OK
<<Zone>>
Handling: The event log stores faults and Two entry-types:

messages.
1.: select <<Information>> and press 1. Messages (only for
OK-button The menu <<Information event log>> can information, with abbreviation
be used to display, print out or cancel the
2.: select <<Event log>> <<Mess.>> in the display)
contents of the memory.
3.: press OK-button It has a 50 event capacity. Each record
2. Faults (with abbreviation
4.: function <<Dispaly Event>> displays date, real time, actual floor level
<<Door:->> in the display)
- press OK-button and a series
5.: continue with OK-button No. A fault entry also shows actual travel
direction and the latest approached door
6.: select entries
side.
Abbreviation used in this chapter:

DFÜ: Data remote LRV: Regulator print for hydraulic. driven (Com. Beringer)
DSK: Digital selector LS: Photocell
Eb./Fl.: Floor SHK: Safety circuit
EM: Extension module
You can find a list of event log entries at the end of this instruction (see side I-A/1).
Notice: The first character of the entry is the sorting.
3.2 Function <<Operational status>>

The operational status of the
Contactor monitor Information
control system is constantly
Control voltage Operation status shown as the normal display.
Voltage monitoring This non-coded display gives
Fl.:1 special maintenance personnel a
continuous overview of the entire
(Normal-display) (Menu-display) installation. Should other
important operational situations
arise they will be displayed in the
first three lines.
You can find a list of operational status at the end of this instruction (see side I-A/1).
Notice: The first character of the entry is the sorting.
I / 12 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
3.3 Function <<Test module>>

Using this menu control inputs and outputs can be displayed. This menu can be selected in the main menu
<<Information / Test module>>
Handling:
1.: select menuline
1. A: 01 Safety circuit 2.: select address,
input or output
!.: selection of the
Input: 2. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 terminals No.
+ - 0-7only by outputs
possible
A: 04 Motor 3.: select terminal
4. 4.: set/reset 24V
signal
Output: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OK OK
! 3. - +
Attention! Do not set output signals while the lift is in use!
Examp. BST 40 -I/O Inputs address 00 Outputs address 04

Voltage monitor Motor
A: 00 Voltage monitor Bit 0 Terminal 201 Bit 0 Relay K31
Bit 1 Terminal 200 Bit 1 Relay K32
Input: * * * * * * 6 7 Bit 2 Ter. 205 (Motor) Bit 2 Relay K33
Bit 3 Ter. 210 (call+outp.) Bit 3 Relay K34
A: 04 Motor Bit 4 False voltage monitor Bit 4 Relay K35
Bit 5 PTC Bit 5 Relay v1/2
Output: 0* * 3 4 5 6 7 Bit 6 reserved internal Bit 6 reserved internal
Bit 7 reserved internal Bit 7 reserved internal
* = Signal set =
Examp. Net-I/O FKF 40 FKF 40 FKF 40
Terminal 1 - 8 Terminal 17 - 24
FKF ID: 1 C C C C C C C C Bit 0 Car call 1 Bit 0 (TE1)
Bit 1 Car call 2 Bit 1 (TE2)
IO (1 - 8): * 0 * 0 * 0 0 0 Bit 2 Car call 3 Bit 2 (TE3)
Bit 3 Car call 4 Bit 3 (TE4)
FKF ID: 1 I I I I I I I I Bit 4 Car call 5 Bit 4 Impulse / level up
Bit 5 Car call 6 Bit 5 Impulse / level down
IO (17-24): 0 0 0 0 * * 0 * Bit 6
Bit 7
Car call 7
Car call 8
Bit 6
Bit 7
Correction top
Correction bottom
0 - = Terminal without function Terminal type: I = Input, O = Output, C = call (Inp./Outp.)

* = Sig. set = , = Sig. n. set,
04.06.2010 I / 13
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
Examp. BST-I/O: "Travel with V-fast (speed)" Inputs address 04 Outputs address 00
Regulator Motor
A: 04 Regulator Bit 0 Regulator fault Bit 0 v1
Bit 1 Regulator stop Bit 1 v2
Input: * * * 3 4 5 6 7 Bit 2 Enable regulator Bit 2 v3
Bit 3 v < 0,3 m/s Bit 3 v4
A: 00 motor Bit 4 v < 0,5 m/s Bit 4 v5
Bit 5 Overspeed Bit 5 vN
Output: 0 * 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bit 6
Bit 7
Break
Contators
Bit 6
Bit 7
vI
vR
* = Signal set =
Examp. Net-I/O IRP and FKF FKF IRP
Terminal 1 - 8 Terminal 1 - 8
FKF 1_0_00 C C C C C C C C Bit 0 Correction top Bit 0 Push butt. door open
Bit 1 Correction bottom Bit 1 Push butt. door close
I/O (1-8): * 0 * 0 * 0 0 0 Bit 2 Prelimit switch top Bit 2 n.c.
Bit 3 Prelimit switch bott. Bit 3 n.c.
IRP 1_1_00 C C C C C C C C Bit 4 Inspection Bit 4 Display-segm. 1
Bit 5 Inspection up Bit 5 Display-segm. 2
I/O (1-8): 0 0 - - 0 0 0 0 Bit 6 Inspection down Bit 6 Display-segm. 3
Bit 7 Full-load Bit 7 Display-segm. 4
* = Signal set = 0 = Signal not set, - = Terminal no function Terminal type: I = Input, O = Output, C = call (Inp./Outp.)
Examp. BST (MPK 400); A10 = Extension module No. 0
A: 07 A10 IO 9 - 16
Input: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A: 07 A10 IO 1 - 8
Input: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
In the case of the ETG-B004 V3 module, the above-mentioned terminal types are displayed in addition to
a "U" for input or output, and an "X" for call or output in the test adapter function.
Terminal description
device MPK-Menu * Default set up Note
C1 1 (C) Call up
C2 2 (C) Call down.
C3 3 (X), 4 (O) Free
IO5 5 (U) Free [1]
O1 6 (O) hall lantern up group.no.* [2]
O2 7 (O) hall lantern down grp.no.* [2]
O3 8 (O) hall lantern up grp.no 2
O4 9 (O) hall lantern down grp.no 2
*terminal type: (C) = call (input and output); (X) = call or input; (U) = input or output; (O) = output
[1]: Either input or output!

[2]: * = current group-no. see menu setting
I / 14 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
3.3.1 Address-set-up BST-inputs
MPK 40 MPK 400
Addr. Bit voltage supervision voltage supervision

00 0 supervision: term. 201 supervision: term. 201
1 supervision: term. 200 supervision: term. 200
2 supervision: motor signal supervision: motor signal
3 supervision: term. 207 (calls) supervision: outputs
4 supervision: fault voltage mon. supervision: fault voltage mon.
5 supervision: PTC supervision: PTC
6 reserved internal reserved internal
7 reserved internal landing control on/off (S35)
Addr. Bit safety circuit safety circuit

01 0 U1 U1
1 U2 U2
2 U3 U3
3 U4 U4
4 U5 U5
5 U6 U6
Addr. Bit free selectable inputs not available

02 0 E1 / contactor monitor **
1 E2 / safety module *
2 E3 / zone safety module *
3 E4 / electr. emerg. operat. on *
4 E5 / electr. emerg. op. (up) *
5 E6 / electr. emerg. op. (down) *
6 E7 / shutdown light off *
7 E8 / monitoring light voltage *
Addr. Bit landing calls 1-8 free selectable inputs

03 0 R1 E1 / contactor monitor **
1 R2 E2 / safety module *
2 R3 E3 / zone safety module *
3 R4 E4 / electr. emerg. operat. on *
4 R5 E5 / electr. emerg. op. (up) *
5 R6 E6 / electr. emerg. op. (down) *
6 R7 E7 / shutdown light off *
7 R8 E8 / monitoring light voltage *
Addr. Bit switch not available

04 0 landing control on/off (S35)
1 reserved internal
2 reserved internal
3 reserved internal
4 reserved internal
5 reserved internal
6 reserved internal
7 reserved internal
* Default set-up ** set-up fixed
04.06.2010 I / 15
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
3.3.2 Address-set-up BST-outputs
MPK 40 MPK 400
Addr. Bit free selectable outputs not available

02 0 A1 / relevelling / decelerated *
1 A2 / shutdown light off *
2 A3 / bridge S10 *
3 A4 / coll. fault register *
4 A5 / in use –light *
5 A6 / out of service *
6 A7 / lock magnet *
7 A8 / valve control *
Addr. Bit landing calls 1-8 not available

03 0 R1
1 R2
2 R3
3 R4
4 R5
5 R6
6 R7
7 R8
Addr. Bit Motor motor

04 0 relay K 31 (up) relay K 31 (up)
1 relay K 32 (down) relay K 32 (down)
2 relay K 33 relay K 33
3 relay K 34 relay K 34
4 relay K 35 (valve control)* relay K 35 (valve control)*
5 v½ v½
Addr. Bit not available free selectable outputs

05 0 A1 / relevelling / decelerated *
1 A2 / shutdown light off *
2 A3 / bridge S10 *
3 A4 / coll. fault register *
4 A5 / in use –light *
5 A6 / out of service *
6 A7 / lock magnet *
7 A8 / valve control *
* Default set-up
3.3.3 MPK 400: Address-set-up extension modules
Module-no.*: 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Addresses term. 1-8: 07 09 0B 0D 0F 11 13 15
Addresses term. 9-16: 06 08 0A 0C 0E 10 12 14
* The module-no. Is set-up with the rotary coding switch on the extension-module.
You set-up only for the unit place. The menu displays the module with no. 10 – 17.
Notice for extension-module no. 17: The set-up of the terminals 1 – 8 is fixed! The signals v-electr.
emergency operation, v3, v4, v5, reference point are available only with extension-module no. 17 on
terminal 9 – 16.
I / 16 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
Adr. Term. Bit Set-up extension module no. 17

15 1 0 v-relev. (output)
2 1 v0 (output)
3 2 v-Inspection (output)
4 3 v1 (output)
5 4 v2 (output)
6 5 Regulator fault (input)
7 6 Regulator electr. stop (input)
8 7 Regulator enable (input)
3.3.4 MPK 400: Address-set-up FKI with IM40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12
I/O: C Call Function

1 R1 car call door 1 floor 1*
8 R8 *** car call door 1 floor 8*
I/O: I Input Function I/O: O Output Function

9 E1 photocell door 1 41 A1 door contr. open door 1 *
10 E2 press. contact door 1 * 42 A2 door contr. close door 1 *
11 E3 open limit switch door 1 * 43 A3 door contr. open door 2 *
12 E4 close limit switch door 1 * 44 A4 door contr. close door 2 *
13 E5 photocell door 2 * 45 A5 shutdown light off *
14 E6 press. contact door 2 * 46 A6 fan output *
15 E7 open limit switch door 2 * 47 A7 free *
16 E8 close limit switch door 2 * 48 A8 free *
17 TE1 door push button open door 1 * 49 D1 display segment 1 *

18 TE2 door push button close door 1 * 50 D2 display segment 2 *
19 TE3 landing control off * 51 D3 display segment 3 *
20 TE4 *** free * 52 D4 display segment 4 *
21 12A floor level / relevell. / imp. up ** 53 D5 display segment 5 *
22 12B fl. level / relevell. / imp. down ** 54 D6 display segment 6 *
23 13A correction top ** 55 D7 display segment 7 *
24 13B correction bottom ** 56 D8 *** display segment 8 *
25 60 inspection ** 57 D9 up -arrow *
26 60A inspection travel up ** 58 D10 down –arrow *
27 60B inspection travel down ** 59 TA1 overload *
28 63 overload ** 60 TA2 *** free *
* Standard set-up ** set-up fixed *** terminal not available on IM 10
04.06.2010 I / 17
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
3.3.5 MPK 400: Address-set-up FKP
I/O: C Call Function I/O: C Call Function

1 R1 car call door 1 floor 1* 41 R17 car call door 1 floor 17*
I/O: I Input Function I/O: O Output Function

9 E1 photocell door 1 57 A1 door contr. open door 1 *
10 E2 press. contact door 1 * 58 A2 door contr. close door 1 *
11 E3 open limit switch door 1 * 59 A3 door contr. open door 2 *
12 E4 close limit switch door 1 * 60 A4 door contr. close door 2 *
13 E5 photocell door 2 * 61 A5 shutdown light off *
14 E6 press. contact door 2 * 62 A6 fan output *
15 E7 open limit switch door 2 * 63 A7 free *
16 E8 close limit switch door 2 * 64 A8 free *
17 TE1 door push button open door 1 * 65 D1 display segment 1 *

18 TE2 door push button close door 1 * 66 D2 display segment 2 *
19 TE3 landing control off * 67 D3 display segment 3 *
20 TE4 free * 68 D4 display segment 4 *
21 12A floor level / relevell. / imp. up ** 69 D5 display segment 5 *
22 12B fl. level / relevell. / imp. down ** 70 D6 display segment 6 *
23 13A correction top ** 71 D7 display segment 7 *
24 13B correction bottom ** 72 D8 display segment 8 *
25 60 inspection ** 73 D9 up -arrow *
26 60A inspection travel up ** 74 D10 down –arrow *
27 60B inspection travel down ** 75 TA1 overload *
28 63 overload ** 76 TA2 free *
* Standard set-up ** set-up fixed
I / 18 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
3.3.6 MPK 40: A.-set-up of the modules: FKF40 with IM 40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12, WFA 40
Test adapter IM 40 -01 / -03 / -10 / -11 / -12 WFA 40

I/O: Car call: Output:
1 R1** 21w / hall lantern up **
Input: Output:
9 E1 / photocell door 1 * 21u / hall lantern down **
10 E2 / press. contact door 1 * 22u / hall lantern down **
11 E3 / open limit switch door 1 * 23u / hall lantern down **
12 E4 / close limit switch door 1 * 24u / hall lantern down **
13 E5 / photocell door 2 * 25u / hall lantern down **
14 E6 / press. contact door 2 * 26u / hall lantern down **
15 E7 / open limit switch door 2 * 27u / hall lantern down **
16 E8 / close limit switch door 2 * 28u / hall lantern down **
17 TE1 / door push but. open door 1 * -
18 TE2 / door push but. close door 1 * -
19 TE3 / landing control off * -
20 TE4 / fan push button * -
21 12A / fl. lev. / relevel. / imp. up ** -
22 12B / fl. lev. / relevel. / imp. down ** -
23 13A / correction top ** -
24 13B / correction bottom ** -
25 60 / inspection ** -
26 60A / inspection travel up ** -
27 60B / inspection travel down ** -
28 63 / overload ** -
Output:
29 A1 / door contr. open door 1 * -
30 A2 / door contr. close door 1 * -
31 A3 / door contr. open door 2 * -
32 A4 / door contr. close door 2 * -
33 A5 / shutdown light off * -
34 A6 / fan output * -
35 A7 / free * -
36 A8 / free * -
37 D1 / display segment 1 * -
45 D9 / arrow-up ** -
46 D10 / arrow- down ** -
47 TA1 / overload * -
48 TA2 / free* -
* Default set-up ** set-up fixed
04.06.2010 I / 19
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
3.4 Function <<Group members>>

The function displays all controls, which the group net contains and the act. status of the controls.
Information
Sign of current group-No.
Group members
All group members No.: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status St.: + - * * * - - -
Status Description
- The control is not into the group net.
+ The control is into the group net, but not active. (special situation; for examp.: maintenance op.)
* The control is into the group net and active.
3.5 Function <<Module list>>

The function shows the modules into the network and the operation status.
B C D
Information
Module list
A FKF 1o 1 tot 4
SLON 1_0_00 ACTIVE
G F E
A Selected module type (term)

B Module-no. of the same module types
C Numbers of the same module types
D Numbers of modules into the database of the BST
E Operation status of the module
<<Ready>>:
The module is connected to the power supply and the network.
The module is recorded of the BST.
The module sends no I/O-information to the BST.
The status is continuous to <<Active>>
<<Active>>:
The module is working with the BST.
<<Reset>>:
The module status was <<Ready>> / <<Active>>, but not available!
Cause: ETG-location is deleted, no valid location
<<Fault>>:
The module reports a fault and is INACTIVE!.
Cause: Module defect
F Location of the module „G_T_EE“: Group-No. (G), Door side (T), Level (EE)
G Network type
I / 20 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
4 Menu <<Testing / Maintenance>> (MPK 40 / 400)

4.1 Menu structure and presettings
Testing/Maintenance The <<Testing / Maintenance>> main menu provides all the functions
needed for commissioning, acceptance tests and maintenance / repairs.
Presetting
On its <<YES>> setting, the <<Door blocking>> function prevents the
Door Blocking
Save events doors of a cabin from opening on arrival of the cabin at a floor.
Test travel speed On its <<YES>> setting, the <<Save events>> function allows entries in
Alarm-Filter the event log also while tests are in progress. To disable the event log,
set this function to <<NO>>.
Completion
The <<Test travel speed>> function is used to specify<<v-insp>>, <<v-el.
Door control
emerg. op. >> or <<v1 to v5>> as a test value. Speed assignments are
Start time monitor
Journey time monitor provided in chapter 4.2.
Braking time monitor After completing work, reset the modified parameters in the <<Door
Reset travmonit. err blocking>> and <<Save events>> functions to their initial values.
Speed-monitoring
Final limit switch On its <<NO>> setting, the <<Alarm-Filter>> function cuts off the filter of
Traction the emergency call signal under the regulations EN81-28.

Weight balance Individual tests are listed under the <<Completion>> menu item. When
Car safety gear this sub-menu is invoked, the control program automatically deletes all
Counterw.safety gear existent travel commands, blocks acceptance of further calls and
Test buffers terminates any travel in progress at the next possible level.
Over-speed
Set call
To allow test runs to be performed, you must parametrize the <<Completion / Testing>> terminal function to one
input and apply +24V to it. A signal change from +24V to 0V interrupts the current test procedure. After completing
your tests, remove the +24V input signal again!
Conduction of tests according to TRA102 and EN81-1 is described in Chapter 2.2 (TRA102) and Appendix D
(EN81-1).
Start time monitor All test runs are started by pressing the arrow key for the desired direction of travel
and holding the key down for the required duration.
Travel down = up =
Fl. 1
Start time monitor While a test run is in progress, the menu displays a new entry in the event log. You
Travel down = up = can press the OK button to directly invoke the event log and read this entry. Press
Fl. 1 entry the ESC key to return from the event log display to the test function.
The test menu window indicates disabling of the lift system together with the related
Display with OK
reason.
* Prerequisite: The <<Save events>> function must be set to <<Yes>>.
04.06.2010 I / 21
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
Test/Maintenance Note: The above-mentioned test runs are not performed when:
Completion - cabin is in motion.

…… - inspections- or electrical emergency-operation is active.
Impossible to test - lift is blocked due „passive safety circuit“.
- control program is in the RESET-status.
- for testing <<Speed monitoring>> no <<DCP-4>> is set.
- for testing <<Traction>> a hydr. / freq. hydr. drive is set.
- voltage supervision is active.
- MPK-Easy is active.
In this cases the menu displays: <<impossible to test>>
4.2 Overview of the testing travels

Stop in the limit floors
switches evaluate [2]
Correction / Prelimit
Menu push buttons
Information in the
Comment
Speed [1]
Function
display
[3]
<<Start time vN Yes Yes current floor Start the test with switch-copier-systems
monitor>> from floor level.
<<Journey time vN Yes Yes current floor -
monitor>>
<<Braking time vN Yes Yes current floor -
monitor>>
<<Speed vN Yes Yes current floor Use the test only with DCP4.
monitoring>>
<<Final limit switch>> vP Yes Yes current floor -
<<Traction>> vP No No current floor Use the test only with rope drives.
The menu displays <<type of cabin motion
type of cabin motion upw., downw., upw., downw., no>> only with APS.
no or watch the drive
<<Weight balance>> - - No current floor Use the test only with rope drives.
The menu displays <<current direction,
Brake closed/opened current and max. speed>> only with APS.
current direction, current and max.
speed or watch the drive
<<Car safety gear>> vP Yes No current floor Use the test out of correction- / pre limit
switches.
current direction, current and max. The menu displays <<current direction,
speed or watch the drive current and max. speed>> only with APS.
<<Counterw. Safety vP Yes No current floor Use the test out of correction- / pre limit
gear>> switches.
<<Test buffers>> vP No No current floor -
<<Over speed>> vP Yes No current floor Use the test out of correction- / pre limit
switches.
[1] vN: max. speed.

vP: pre selected speed in the menu <<Testing/Maintenance, presetting / test travel speed>> (v-insp, v-el. emerg. op. or v1 to v5).
It is possible, that the shaft copier system restricts the speeds (s.[2]).
[2] Yes: Start- and braking- speed are dependent on the correction- and pre limit switches.
No: Start with vN or vP. NO braking at the limit floors!
[3] Yes: The lift stops at the limit floor.
No: The lift stops not at the limit floor.
I / 22 04.06.2010
MPK 40 / 400
Instruction
4.3 Function <<Start-, journey-, braking time monitor>>

The specifications under <<Settings / travel monitor>> are retained. For the purpose of testing, the control
program automatically shortens the monitoring times.
Travel monitor Time monitor Travel target Speed

<<Start time monitor>> 1s Limit floor of direction of travel With respect to floor
spacing; maximum
<<Journey time monitor>> 0,5 s Limit floor of direction of travel
possible speed
<<Braking time monitor>> 0,5 s Max. 2 floors from the current floor in the
direction of travel
4.4 Function <<Reset travel monitor error>>

If a test under <<Start-, journey-, braking time monitor>> results in disabling, this function performs
enabling again. This function can only be used to re-enable journey test times, It cannot be used to
perform re-enabling following triggering of a PTC resistor, for example.
4.5 Function <<Speed monitoring>>

In the case of frequency-regulated drives with DCP4 control and an additional S19 limit speed switch, this
menu item can be used to check the switch's functionality. The specified limit speed is not considered
during this check. Only a change in the signal of switch S19 from +24V to 0V is monitored. To perform this
test, press the arrow key for the desired direction of travel and hold the key down for the required duration.
The test proves successful if the control system interrupts the journey on a change of the signal from
switch S19.
4.6 Function <<Door control>>

This function is used to open and close the cabin doors irrespective of the cabin's
Door side 1
position in the shaft and the <<No door>> parameters in the door table. The +/-
Side = cl.= op.= keys can be used to select the door side, the arrow keys to control door movement,
Fl.: 1 which only takes place while the keys are held down.
4.7 Function <<Set call>>

To issue a command to travel to the highest or lowest level, press the
Set call
corresponding arrow key. To interrupt a journey at once, press the ESC key.
Call bottom= top=
Fl.: 1
04.06.2010 I / 23
MPK 400
Event log entries
Activation, APS-Learn. Operation [M]

Explanation: The APS-Learn. Operation has been activated.
Possib. cause: -
Activation, APS-Learning Travel [M]
Explanation: The APS-Learning travel has been activated.
Possib. cause: -
Activation, Emerg. Power Contr. [M]
Explanation: The signal of the input "Emerg. Power Contr." was set.
Possib. cause: -
Activation, Fire Evacu. Service [M]
Explanation: The signal of the input "Fire Evacu. Service" was set.
Possib. cause: -
Activation, FireFight. Ctrl. Ext [M]
Explanation: The signal of the input "FireFight. Ctrl. Ext" was set.
Possib. cause: -
Activation, FireFight. Ctrl. Int [M]
Explanation: The signal of the input "FireFight. Ctrl. Int" was set.
Possib. cause: -
Activation, Input Alarm [M]
Explanation: The signal of the input "Alarm" was set.
Possib. cause: -
Activation, Readiness Service [M]
Explanation: The signal of the input "Readiness Service" was set.
Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Function Error {Test}* [F]
Explanation: The displayed test {Test}*was passed faulty.
*the name of the test is displayed, where the error occurs
Possib. cause: The checked function is faulty.
autom. Function Test, Function Monitoring [M]
Explanation: This is the message of the selftest.
Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Impossible to Test {Test}* [F]
Explanation: The basics (freeprogr. Inp./Outp.)to check the function {Test}* are not existing. *the name of the test is displayed, where
the error occurs
Possib. cause: Check the necessary Inputs/Outputs.
autom. Function Test, Test completed [M]
Explanation: A cycle test was completed.
Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Test interrupted {Operation Status}* [F]
Explanation: A test sequence was interrupted by another operation status {operation status}*. *the name of the operation status will
displayed, who has prevented or interrupted the test sequence
Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Test not started {Operation Status}* [F]
Explanation: A test sequence was prevented due to higher priority operation status {operation status}*. *the name of the operation
status will displayed, who has prevented or interrupted the test sequence
Possib. cause: -
autom. Function Test, Timed Out {Test}* [F]
Explanation: The test sequence {test}* could not be finished during the expacting time. *the name of the test is displayed, where the
error occurs
Possib. cause: Travel interrupt; door(s) is/are blocked
card-fault, BST / APS [F]
Explanation: The APS print was not recognized by the controller.
Possib. cause: Wrong BST-Version; check the connection to the MAPS print
card-fault, BST / DSK [F]
Explanation: The SEM-DSK print was not recognized by the controller.
Possib. cause: Wrong BST-Version
card-fault, car calls [F]
Explanation: The car call print has not been recognized by the controller.
Possib. cause: print missing or defect
card-fault, MAPS-Module [F]
Explanation: The MAPS-module was not recognized by the controller.
Possib. cause: Print is missing or defect; check the contact of the MAPS-module and the controller.
card-fault, MDSK-module [F]
Explanation: After switching on the MDSK print was not recognized by the control.
Possib. cause: check parametern in the basis settings menu check connections to the MDSK print; check status LED on the DSK print
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 17.06.2011 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I–A/1
MPK 400
Event log entries
card-fault, motor [F]

Explanation : The dirve print has not been recognized by the controller (only for regulated traction lifts).
Possib. Cause : print missing or defect
card-fault, Selector-module [F]
Explanation : After switching on the MDSK- or the SEM-DSK print was not recognized by the control.
Possib. Cause : check parametern in the basis settings menu check connections to the MDSK- or the SEM-DSK print ; check status LED
on the MDSK- or the SEM-DSK print
card-fault, Standard-LPK [F]
Explanation : After power on / RESET no LPK-card was identified.
Possib. Cause : Wrong LPK-program version ; no contact to the processor unit
card-fault, V24 Module [F]
Explanation : The V24-module was not recognized by the controller.
Possib. Cause : Print is missing or defect ; check the contact of the V24 module and the controller.
Deactivation, APS-Learn. Operation [M]
Explanation : The APS-Learn. Operation has been deactivated.
Possib. Cause : -
Deactivation, APS-Learning Travel [M]
Explanation : The APS-Learning travel has been deactivated.
Possib. Cause : -
Deactivation, Emerg. Power Contr. [M]
Explanation : The signal of the input « Emerg. Power Contr. » Was cut off.
Possib. Cause : -
Deactivation, Fire Evacu. Service [M]
Explanation : The signal of the input « Fire Evacu. Service » was cut off.
Possib. Cause : -
Deactivation, FireFight. Ctrl. Ext [M]
Explanation : The signal of the input « FireFight. Ctrl. Ext » was cut off.
Possib. Cause : -
Deactivation, FireFight. Ctrl. Int [M]
Explanation : The signal of the input « FireFight. Ctrl. Int » was cut off.
Possib. Cause : -
Deactivation, Input Alarm [M]
Explanation : The signal of the input « Alarm » was cut off.
Possib. Cause : -
Deactivation, Readiness Service [M]
Explanation : The signal of the input « Readiness Service » was cut off.
Possib. Cause : -
door blocking, no. of stop blocked [M]
Explanation : All floors/doors are blocked.
Possib. Cause : Too many floors/doors blocked via modules / menu.
Door fault, Blocked Due Cl. Limit [F]
Explanation : The indicated door was blocked when closing.
Possib. Cause : check door drive ; check door mechanism ; check door closed limit switch
door fault, Blocked Due Op. Limit [F]
Explanation : The indicated door was blocked when opening.
Possib. Cause : check door drive ; check door mechanism ; check door open limit switch
door fault, Both Limit Switches [F]
Explanation : At the indicated door both limit swithes get (low-)active at the same time.
Possib. Cause : Check door limit switches ; check wiring und connectors
door fault, Check Lock Bounce Time [F]
Explanation : The set time for lock contact bounce is too short.
Possib. Cause : extend lock contact bounce timer ; check lock mechanism
door fault, door close fault [F]
Explanation : The door closing monitor registered an unsuccessful door closing operation (Input U4/door contact or U5/car door contact).
Possib. Cause : check door drive ; check door mechanism
door fault, Door Lock Fault [F]
Explanation : The door closing monitor registered an unsuccessful door lock operation (Input U6/lock contact).
Possib. Cause : check door time ; check door lock
door fault, photocell blocked [F]
Explanation : The photocell ist blocked or faulty.
Possib. Cause : check photocell
drive, no no Serial Motor Link [F]
Explanation : The drive system doesn´t support a serial data link.
Possib. Cause : Only the driving typs ´Variable Freq. AC´ and ´Hydr. Variable Freq.´ support a serial data link. If any other driving typ has
been choosed the serial data link has to be set to ínactiv´.
I–A/2 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 17.06.2011 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
MPK 400
Event log entries
Drive, Serial Motor Link [F]

Explanation : The MPK and the regulator are using a different serial protocol.
Possib. Cause : Set both the MPK and the regulator to the same serial protocol.
Emerg. Power Control, no more attempt [F]
Explanation : Max. Number of starts to the emerg. Power floor is reached.
Possib. Cause : Faults, which prevent the starts.
Event log, *** MPK-Delete *** [M]
Explanation : The event log was deleted at the indicated time.
Possib. Cause : -
event log, Starts on: [M]
Explanation : Time of start of event logging.
Possib. Cause : -
Extension Module, 24V-supply [F]
Explanation : Extension module without power supply.
Possib. Cause : Terminal + / - of the extension module not connected.
Extension Module, Faulty Component [F]
Explanation : Extension module without identification from the processor.
Possib. Cause : Check the connection and the code-switch of the extension module.
Functional Test, Speed v1 [F]
Explanation : The functional test has detected a difference between the speed output v1 to the drive and re-reading the speed comands.
Possib. Cause : None or faulty wiring ; check the MPK and the drive
Functional Test, vEmergency Elec. Operation [F]
Explanation : The functional test has detected a difference between the emergency electrical operation speed output to the drive and re-
reading the speed comands.
Functional Test, vInspection [F]
Explanation : The functional test has detected a difference between the inspection speed output to the drive and re-reading the speed
comands.
group operartion, not return to group [M]
Explanation : After a fault is no return to the group possible.
Possib. Cause : No correct finish of a travel.
Group operation, group-no. reserved [F]
Explanation : Another lift is provided with the same group / lift-no.
Possib. Cause : Check the group / lift-no.
Inspection, Car Module-Monitor [F]
Explanation : Inspection operation : No car module is identified.
Possib. Cause : Module is not available ; power supply fault ; connection fault
inspection, contactor monitor [F]
Explanation : The contactor monitor has been activated during inspection travel.
Possib. Cause : main contactor defect main contactor contact failure
inspection, control voltage [F]
Explanation : The control voltage supply has been interrupted. If the control voltage
supply returns, the controller restarts automatically.
Possib. Cause : check power supply of the control
inspection, inverter enable [F]
Explanation : The signal « inverter enable » cuts off at a travel while the inspection operation.
Possib. Cause : Check inverter and connection « inverter enable »
inspection, LRV contact inactive [F]
Explanation : The SIUA.1 on the control card has tripped during inspect. Travel.
Possib. Cause : check setting of the control card
MPK 400
Event log entries
inspection, MPK Input Data Fault [S]

Explanation : Inspection operation : The MPK had received faulty messages at least for 150ms or longer.
Possib. Cause : Regulator has been turned off ; faulty or non-present data line beetween MPK and the regulator ; exchange terminal link
87 and terminal link 88 ; check the shielding of the chopper power supply ; check the shielding of the data line ; check the
shielding of the motor power supply ; faulty regulator hardware ; faulty MPK hardware ; faulty MAPS hardware
inspection, Primary Safety Circ. [F]
Explanation : The primary safety circuit has been opened.
Possib. Cause : check the over-speed governor
inspection, Reg. InputData Fault [S]
Explanation : Inspection operation : The regulator had received faulty messages at least for 150ms or longer.
Possib. Cause : Faulty data line beetween MPK and the regulator ; check the shielding of the chopper power supply ; check the shielding
of the data line ; check the shielding of the motor power supply ; faulty regulator hardware ; faulty MPK hardware ; faulty
MAPS hardware
inspection, regulat. Flt .active [F]
Explanation : The regulator monitor has been activated during inspection travel.
Possib. Cause : check setting of the regulator
inspection, Regulator Connection [F]
Explanation : Inspection operation : The serial connection between MPK and the regulator had or has been cut off.
inspection, Regulator Connection [S]
Explanation : Inspection operation : The MPK and the regulator had received faulty messages at least for 150ms or longer.
MAPS hardware
inspection, regulator prewarning [F]
Explanation : Inspection operation : The regulator announces a temperature that is less than 10 Grad Celsius under the treshold.
Possib. Cause : cooling insufficient ; regulator overcharged ; regulator dimension ist insufficient
inspection, slowdown monitoring [F]
Explanation : Inspection operation : The slowdown monitoring module registered a fault.
Possib. Cause : Check slowdown monitor module ; Check regulator set-up ; Check drive ; Check selector informations
inspection, thermistor [F]
Explanation : The drive thermistor has tripped during inspection travel.
Possib. Cause : drive motor overheated
lift blocked due to APS [F]
Explanation : Blocked due to a major fault.
Possib. Cause : no learning journey has taken place ; serious fault
lift blocked due to brake wear [F]
Explanation : The control input terminal « brake wear » has tripped.
Possib. Cause : Check the brake, check the polarity of the input terminal
lift blocked due to Car Module-Monitor [F]
Explanation : No car module is identified in the SLON-net.
lift blocked due to contact. Mon. [F]
Explanation : The main contactor monitor has been activated.
Possib. Cause : main contactor defect ; main contactor contact failure
lift blocked due to dig. Selector [F]
Explanation : Blocked due to a major fault.
Possib. Cause : no learning journey has taken place ; serious fault
lift blocked due to drive [F]
Explanation : No valid drive system has been set or the function test of the speed outputs has been triggered.
Possib. Cause : Set valid drive type in « basic settings » menu or faulty wiring to the drive / machine.
Lift blocked due to false voltage [F]
Explanation : The false voltage test equipment has recognized voltage greater than 60 volt at the control system (only possible with a
false voltage test equipment).
Possib. Cause : Check the wiring of shaft and car signals.
Lift blocked due to group [F]
Explanation : The controller has recognized a fault during group startup.
Possib. Cause : Check the settings for the group-ID.
Lift blocked due to LRV contact [F]
Explanation : The SIUA.1 on the control card has tripped.
Possib. Cause : check settings of the control card
lift blocked due to Motor Thermistor [F]
Explanation : The drive thermistor has tripped.
Possib. Cause : drive has overheated
MPK 400
Event log entries
lift blocked due to reg.prewarn. [F]

Explanation: The lift is blocked due to the regulator prewarning that is activ.
Possib. cause: cooling insufficient. regulator overcharged. regulator dimension ist insufficient.
lift blocked due to regulat. flt. [F]
Explanation: The supervisory contact of the regulator has ben activated.
Possib. cause: check regulator settings
lift blocked due to relevelling [F]
Explanation: A fault has been found during relevelling.
Possib. cause: the relevelling time has been exceeded the set no. of relevelling actions has been exceeded; check the relevelling impulse
switches; magnet switch defect
lift blocked due to safety circ. [F]
Explanation: The primary safety circuit has been opened.
Possib. cause: check all switches in the primary safety circuit; check control power supply voltage
lift blocked due to selector flt. [F]
Explanation: Error in the shaft signals.
Possib. cause: switching sequence error; magnet switch defect
lift blocked due to slowdown mon. [F]
Explanation: The slowdown monitoring module registered a fault.
Possib. cause: Check slowdown monitor module; Check regulator set-up; Check drive; Check selector informations
lift blocked due to travelmonitor [F]
Explanation: One of the travel time monitors has over-run.
Possib. cause: check start time monitor; check running time monitor; check decelleration time monitor; magnet switch defect
lift blocked due to Univers. Input [F]
Explanation: An universal input with an accordingly adjusted reaction is changed to an active signal.
Possib. cause: Check the module/sensor, which is connected to the universal input.
lift blocked due to Zone Switch [F]
Explanation: A safety contact has tripped.
Possib. cause: check settings of the safety features; check shaft signals in the safety module; magnet switch defect
lift blocked, change parameter [F]
Explanation: Due the changes in operating parameters the lift has become blocked.
Possib. cause: after changing parameters in basic settings the RESET button was not operated
Lift Blocked, due to Function Test [F]
Explanation: An error occurs during the automatic fubction test.
Possib. cause: One of the check function is faulty.
lift blocked, due to System Error [F]
Explanation: Systemfault!
Possib. cause: wrong controller components
lift blocked, Missing Group-LPK [F]
Explanation: No group-LPK was identified after power on or reset.
Possib. cause: Wrong LPK-program version; no connection to the processor unit
lift blocked, Missing Stand.-LPK [F]
Explanation: No Standard-LPK-card was identified after power on or reset.
Possib. cause: wrong LPK-program version; no connection to the processor unit
log off by:, (user name) [M]
Explanation: The registered user logged off.
Possib. cause: -
Log on by:, (user name) [M]
Explanation: The registered user logged on.
Possib. cause: -
maintenance finished [M]
Explanation: The signal of the input "maintenance" was cut off.
Possib. cause: -
maintenance situat. [M]
Explanation: The signal of the input "maintenance" was set or the saving of new events was switched off at "Testing/Maintenance /
Presetting"
Possib. cause: -
mess.: Change EmergLightAcc [M]
Explanation: The accumulator of the emergency light power pack must be changed as soon as possible.
Possib. cause: -
mess.: run time exceeded [M]
Explanation: The set running time was reached.
Possib. cause: -
mess.:, learn trav. valid [M]
Explanation: A learning travel was successfullycompleted.
Possib. cause: -
MPK 400
Event log entries
mess.:, programstart [M]

Explanation: A "switch on" of the control, or operation of the RESET button has occurred.
Possib. cause: -
mess.:, terminal unreserved [M]
Explanation: One or more connections in the flexible terminals have been lost.
Possib. cause: programm versions change has occured; check connections in the flexible terminals
mess.:, trip no. reached [M]
Explanation: The trip counter setting was reached.
Possib. cause: -
Modem Fault, Modem Conf. Wrong [F]
Explanation: No init of the modem.
Possib. cause: faulty initstring; modem is not compatible with Hayes-commands;
GPRS-PIN and/or the GPRS-Accesspoint is invalid/faulty
Modem Fault, Modem Not Ready [F]
Explanation: No communication between MPK and modem.
Possib. cause: no modem connected; modem without power supply; faulty modem terminals
Modem Fault, No Connection Establ [F]
Explanation: The MPK could not constitute a connection with the parametrized remote office. 5 undelayed trials as well as 3 trials with a
delay of 30 minutes failed.
Possib. cause: remote office was busy several times; faulty phone no. of remote office set in the controller
Modem Fault, No Phone Number [F]
Explanation: No phone-no. set-up in the MPK.
Possib. cause: No phone-no.
module ńumber´, 24V-supply [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ńumber´, is announcing a faulty 24V-supply.
Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault.
module ńumber´, counter fault [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ńumber´, is announcing an internal counter fault.
Possib. cause: internal fault.
module ńumber´, fifo overflow [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ńumber´, is announcing an internal fifo overflow.
module ńumber´, IO-error [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ńumber´, is announcing a faulty input respectively output.
Possib. cause: internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ńumber´, life check [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ńumber´, is announcing a life check error between the module and the BST.
Possib. cause: connection fault; internal fault.
module ńumber´, overflow [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ńumber´, is announcing an internal overflow.
Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault; internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ńumber´, status fault [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ńumber´, is announcing a status fault.
Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault; internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
module ńumber´, system - fault [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the internal index ńumber´, is announcing an internal system fault.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, 24V-supply [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing a faulty 24V-supply.
Possib. cause: power supply fault; connection fault.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, counter fault [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing an internal counter fault.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, fifo overflow [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing an internal fifo overflow.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, IO-error [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing a faulty input respectively
output.
module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, life check [S]
Explanation: The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing a life check error between the
module and the BST.
Possib. cause: connection fault; internal fault.
MPK 400
Event log entries
Module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, overflow [S]

Explanation : The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing an internal overflow.
Possib. Cause : power supply fault ; connection fault ; internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
Module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, status fault [S]
Explanation : The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing a status fault.
Possib. Cause : power supply fault ; connection fault ; internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
Module ´prog-id´ ´loc-id´, system – fault [S]
Explanation : The module, referenced by the program-id ´prog-id´ and the location ´loc-id´, is announcing an internal system fault.
Possib. Cause : internal fault (please make a note of the complete event message).
Operating system, system – fault [S]
Explanation : internal fault.
Possib. Cause : Operating system is recognizing a lack of internal ressources.
Pawl device, area depart [F]
Explanation : The area where pawl device activities are allowed was leaved. This area is normaly equal to the zone of the safety circuit.
Possib. Cause : check bolt reversal area ; check zone switch ; check motor ; check input « touchdown active » and the the connected
switch ; check pawl device mechanics
pawl device, depart overrun area [F]

Explanation : The area where a reversal of bolts is allowed was leaved during the reversal.
Possib. Cause : check area of bolt reversal ; check motor
pawl device, li.sw.activ. missing [F]
Explanation : At least one of the limit switches « bolts activated » has become inactive after activating the bolt.
Possib. Cause : check input « Bolt Limit Sw. Deact » and the connected limit switch(es) ; check bolts
pawl device, li.sw.deactiv. missing [F]
Explanation : At least one of the limit switches « bolts deactivated » has become inactive after deactivating the bolts.
Possib. Cause : check input « Bolt Limit Sw. Activ » and the connected limit switch(es) ; check bolts
pawl device, limit switch defect [F]
Explanation : The inputs « Bolt Limit Sw. Activ » and « Bolt Limit Sw. Deact » had been active at the same time.
Possib. Cause : check « Bolt Limit Sw. Activ » and « Bolt Limit Sw. Deact » and the connected limit switches.
Pawl device, Motor [F]
Explanation : no response from the motor (internal fault).
Possib. Cause : check motor ; check relay-modules ; check connections
pawl device, no zone during relev. [F]
Explanation : No zone signal was recognized prior to touchdown travel.
Possib. Cause : check the safety circuit module ; magnet switch defect
pawl device, overload monitoring [M]
Explanation : The input óverload´ had become active, after the bolts of the pawl device had been deactivated.
Possib. Cause : car overloaded ; check input Óverload´ and the connect switch
pawl device, Safety Module [F]
Explanation : The safety module announced a fault,during pawl device was active.
Possib. Cause : check the safety module ; magnet switch defect
pawl device, touchdown active [F]
Explanation : A downwards travel to the area of bolt reversal couldn´t be exceeded because the input ´touchdown active´ was active.
Possib. Cause : check input ´touchdown active´ and the connected switch ; check area of bolt reversal ; check mechanics of the pawl
device
pawl device, vRelev > 0.3 m/s [F]
Explanation : The upper releveling speed limit is exceeded.
Possib. Cause : Check releveling speed setting and relevelling speed monitor setting.
Pawl device, zone fault [F]
Explanation : During pawl device activities the lift left the relevelling zone.
Possib. Cause : check bolt reversal area ; check zone switch ; check input « touchdown active » and the the connected switch
regulator , Break Signal lost [F]
Explanation : The signal « electrical stop » from the regulator became inactive in travel.
Possib. Cause : check the regulator
regulator prewarning, has tripped [F]
Explanation : The regulator announces a temperature that is less than 10 °C under the temperature tres hold.
Possib. Cause : cooling insufficient ; regulator overcharged ; regulator dimension ist insufficient
regulator, … (see explanation) [F]
Explanation : The regulator announces a typal error text.
Possib. Cause : regulator realize an error ; read the regulator manual
regulator, Break Signal lost [F]
Explanation : The signal « electrical stop » from the regulator become inactive before the controller stops the drive.
Possib. Cause : check regulator
regulator, over-speed [F]
Explanation : The regulator announces over-speed (1.1 times as much as the nominal travel speed).
Possib. Cause : Check regulator ; Check drive
MPK 400
Event log entries
relevelling, motor [F]

Explanation : The relevelling has not been started or finished.
Possib. Cause : Check the wiring between motor and the motor extension module.
Relevelling, no zone during relev. [M]
Explanation : No zone signal was recognized prior to relevelling.
Possib. Cause : check the safety circuit module ; magnet switch defect
relevelling, relev. No. overflow [M]
Explanation : The pre-set no. Of relevelling attempts at one floor level has been exceeded.
Possib. Cause : check relevelling attempt setting ; oil leak on hydraulic lift
relevelling, Safety Module [F]
Explanation : The safety module registered a fault during relevelling.
Possib. Cause : check the safety module ; magnet switch defect
relevelling, time overflow [F]
Explanation : Relevelling was not completed within the pre-set time.
Possib. Cause : check the monitor time setting ; lift blocked during relevelling ; magent switch defect
relevelling, vRelev > 0.3 m/s [M]
Explanation : The upper releveling speed limit is exceeded.
Possib. Cause : Check releveling speed setting and relevelling speed monitor setting
relevelling, zone fault [F]
Explanation : During relevelling the lift left the relevelling zone.
Possib. Cause : the switching point for relevelling was not recognised ; check the shaft relevelling signals ; magnet switch defect
remote control fault, function activation [F]
Explanation : The activation of a function via remote control has not been taken place.
Possib. Cause : Check terminal settings ; check remote control settings
Remote Set-Up, Reset activated [S]
Explanation : The controller was reset via a VisualLift command.
Possib. Cause :
Remote-fault, Testcall failure [F]
Explanation : The function « Testcall », to check the recall settings to the remote control office (VisualLift server), failed.
Possib. Cause : Check remote control-/modemsettings and « tel.no. Modem PC ». Check the connection to the modem- and/or the DLON-
gateway.
Remote-Message, Testcall successful [M]
Explanation : The function « Testcall », to check the recall settings to the remote control office (VisualLift server), was successful done.
Possib. Cause : -
safe. Circ. In trav., car door open [F]
Explanation : The car door was opened during travel.
Possib. Cause : check car door or door end contacts
safe. Circ. In trav., control voltage [F]
safe. Circ. In trav., door open [F]
Explanation : A landing door was opened during travel.
Possib. Cause : doors were opened by the emergency lock release
safe. Circ. In trav., emerg. Limit switch [F]
Explanation : The terminal limit switch has been tripped.
Possib. Cause : interruption of the passive safety circuit ; check the terminal limit switch
safe. Circ. In trav., Lock Open [F]
Explanation : A lock contact was opened during the travel.
Possib. Cause : check door lock
safe. Circ. In trav., Primary Safety Circ. [F]
Explanation : A contact was opened during the travel.
Possib. Cause : Check all contacts in the primary safety circuit.
Safe. Circ. In trav., safe.circ. pawl dev. [M]
Explanation : The input ´Safe.Circ. Pawl Dev.´ became inaktive during a travel.
Possib. Cause : check pawl device mechanics ; check input ´Safe.Circ. Pawl Dev.´ and the connected switch
safety circ., control voltage [F]
safety circ., emerg. Limit switch [F]
Explanation : The terminal limit switch has been interrupted.
Possib. Cause : interruption of the passive safety circuit
MPK 400
Event log entries
safety circuit, interrupted [F]

Explanation: After door closing (satefty circuit is complety closed) and before the motor start sequence begins one or more of the
contacts U4 until U6 reopens again or temporary interrupted.
Possib. cause: check the door closing sequence and/or the door locking; increase the value for the lock bounce timer
safety circuit, Lock Fast Start [F]
Explanation: The monitoring of the inputs Ú6´ and ´lock fast start´ has detected a incorrect switching state of one of these inputs.
Possib. cause: check any switching element connected to the inputs Ú6´ and ´lock fast start´
safety circuit, Primary Safety Circ. [F]
Explanation: A primary safety circuit has been interrupted.
Possib. cause: check over-speed governor and similar items
Safety Module, input has tripped [F]
Explanation: The safety module registered a fault.
Possib. cause: check the safety module; magnet switch defect
Safety Module, no zone with standing [F]
Explanation: No zone signal was recognized while standing at the floor.
Possib. cause: check the safety switching module; zone switch defect; check zone signal to the MDSK PCB; check wiring to the DSK PCB
Safety Module, preopen & relev. off [F]
Explanation: The safety module registered a fault resulting in the door preopen & relevelling features being inhibited.
Possib. cause: check the safety module; magnet switch defect
selctor fault, no prelimit top [F]
Explanation: The prelimit switch top was not recognized by the controller on travelling up.
Possib. cause: Check shaft signals at the upper shaft area; check the deceleration- and count-signals; magnet switch defect
selector fault, APS-Initialisation [F]
Explanation: After power on the MPK couldn´t establish a connection to the MAPS-module.
Possib. cause: Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, act. location msg. 1 [S]
Explanation: The MAPS-module didn´t supply a valid level information.
Possib. cause: encoder defect; encoder wiring faulty; check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
Explanation: The actual level information supplied by the MAPS-module couldn´t be read by the MPK.
Explanation: Due to insufficient MPK-RAM, there is no MAPS-level information available.
Possib. cause: Check program configuration of the MPK; Check hardware of the MPK.
selector fault, APS-Connection [F]
Explanation: The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off.
selector fault, APS-Travel Monitor [F]
Explanation: The MAPS-Module announces that the car is travelling in the wrong direction.
Possib. cause: Check the settings of the motor and inverter.
selector fault, both correct. swit. [F]
Explanation: The correction signals at both ends of travel have been recognized at the same time.
Possib. cause: check shaft signals in the correction zone; magnet switch defect
selector fault, bottom correct def. [F]
Explanation: The bottom correction switch was recognized in up travel at a level which is not the top or bottom floor.
Possib. cause: check shaft signals of the bottom correction; magnet switch defect
selector fault, brake without selec. [S]
Explanation: internal fault.
Possib. cause: Request for slowing down without selecting a target floor level.
selector fault, broadcast overflow [S]
Explanation: The communication between MPK and MDSK- respectively MAPS-module was cut off.
Possib. cause: Check if the MDSK- respectively the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, com.-initialization [S]
Explanation: After power on the MPK couldn´t establish a connection to the MAPS-module.
selector fault, connect. monitor [S]
selector fault, connection timeout [S]
selector fault, correct bot unexpect. [F]
Explanation: The bottom correction switch was recognized too early in down travel due to a counter error.
Possib. cause: check shaft signals; check impulse counter; magnet switch defect
MPK 400
Event log entries
selector fault, correct top unexpect. [F]

Explanation : The top correction switch was recognized too early in up travel due to a counter error.
Possib. Cause : check shaft signals ; check impulse counter ; manget switch defect
selector fault, Counter Adjustment [F]
Explanation : The internal counter was re-adjusted when the lift travelled into the destination level.
Possib. Cause : check shaft signals ; check incrementer ; check incrementer wiring fault in the incrementer wiring
selector fault, counter overrun [F]
Explanation : The internal counter range has been exceeded.
Possib. Cause : select reduced resolution for incrementer ; check polarity of the incrementer signal
selector fault, DCP-Destinat.-Level [S]
Explanation : Only DCP4 : The MAPS-Modul renews the remaining distance to the next floor, although the MPK wants to stop at the
actual level.
Possib. Cause : Check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
Selector fault, DCP-Stop-Level [S]
Explanation : Only DCP4 : The MPK tries to stop on a level, after the remaining distance has been renewed to the next floor.
Selector fault, DCP4 without MAPS [F]
Explanation : The type of selector doesn´t support DCP4 (MPK400).
Possib. Cause : Only the selector typ ÁPS´ supports a DCP-connection. If any other type of selector has been choosed DCP-connection
has to be set to ´Ziehl-Abegg DCP 3´ or to ínactiv´ (MPK400).
Selector fault, Direction Monitor [F]
Explanation : During a travel the MPK is recognizing, that the MAPS-module announces a direction that doesn´t fit to the travel direction.
Possib. Cause : Check the settings of the motor and inverter.
Selector fault, DSK-broadcast-ovflw [S]
Explanation : The communication between MPK and SEM-DSK-module was cut off.
Possib. Cause : Check if the SEM-DSK-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
Selector fault, DSK-com.-initial. [S]
Explanation : After power on the SEM-DSK-module couldn´t establish a connection to the MPK.
Selector fault, DSK-connection [F]
Explanation : Connection to the MDSK print was lost during operation.
Possib. Cause : Check connections to the MDSK print.
Selector fault, DSK-initialisation [F]
Explanation : After switching on the control connection could not be made with the MDSK print.
Possib. Cause : Check connections to the MDSK print check the LED´s on the MDSK print.
Selector fault, DSK-List-FIFO [S]
Explanation : Due to insufficient SEM-DSK-RAM, the allocation of the SEM-DSK-FIFOs wasn´t accomplished.
Selector fault, DSK-rcv.-overflow [S]
Selector fault, DSK-receive-collis. [S]
Selector fault, DSK-reset [F]
Explanation : The MDSK print reports a RESET.
Possib. Cause : Check the control supply voltages.
Selector fault, DSK-timeout [S]
Selector fault, DSK-Travel Monitor [F]
Explanation : The SEM-DSK-Module announces that the car is travelling in the wrong direction.
Possib. Cause : Check the settings of the motor and inverter.
Selector fault, encoder defect [F]
Explanation : No signal has been recognized from the incrementer.
Possib. Cause : incrementer defect ; wiring fault to the incrementer
selector fault, faulty startparamet. [S]
Explanation : Travel can´t be started due to missing MDSK- respectively MAPS-modul level informations.
Possib. Cause : Check if the MDSK- respectively the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
Selector fault, floor no. variation [F]
Explanation : The learning journey shows a different no. Of stops to the setting.
Possib. Cause : check no. Of stops in the menu « basic settings » ; check the zone signal to the MDSK print
selector fault, floor-value wrong [F]
Explanation : After a learning journey the floor level values are not in ascending order.
Possib. Cause : incrementer defect ; faults with the incrementer wiring
I – A / 10 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 17.06.2011 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System
MPK 400
Event log entries
selector fault, incorrect zone [F]

Explanation : A false sequence of zones was recognized during the learning journey.
Possib. Cause : zone switch defect ; check zone signal to the MDSK print ; check connections to the MDSK print
selector fault, invalid impuls [S]
Explanation : The level information reported during the travel from the MAPS-module is invalid.
Possib. Cause : encoder defect ; encoder wiring faulty ; check if the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
Selector fault, invalid location [S]
Explanation : The reported level information from the MAPS-module is invalid.
Selector Fault, invalid Position [F]
Explanation : The absolute encoder is announcing a position, that is out of the range of the learned shaft positions.
Possib. Cause : replacement of the encoder ; adjustment of the encoder without coupling to the lift ; faulty encoder
selector fault, learn trav. Not valid [F]
Explanation : An activated learning journey was not successfully completed.
Possib. Cause : check settings ; severe fault (check the event log)
selector fault, learn. Trav. Interr. [F]
Explanation : An activated learning travel was interrupted.
Possib. Cause : learning travel was stopped by maintenance personnel severe fault (check the event log)
Selector Fault, Level Offset: … mm [S]
Explanation : After a normal stop (in case of DSK or APS) a level offset greater than the Level Offset Limit was measured. The offset to
level is shown in mm in addition to the stop position (above or below).
Possib. Cause : Check drive ; check switch-values ; check shaft signals ; check incrementer ;
selector fault, Level Values invalid [F]
Explanation : The values of the floor levels are momentary invalid.
Possib. Cause : the number of floor level has changed since the last learning travel ; the values of the floor levels aren´t in a rising order
selector fault, List-FIFO [S]
Explanation : Due to insufficient MPK-RAM, the allocation of the APS-FIFOs wasn´t accomplished.
Possib. Cause : Check program configuration of the MPK ; Check hardware of the MPK.
Selector fault, load DSK-program [S]
Explanation : The code of the SEM-DSK-program program couldn´t be transfered to the SEM-DSK-module.
Selector fault, load MAPS-program [S]
Explanation : The code of the MAPS-program program couldn´t be transfered to the MAPS-module.
Selector fault, MAPS-broadcast-ovflw [S]
Explanation : The communication between MPK and MAPS-module was cut off.
Selector fault, MAPS-com.-initial. [S]
Explanation : After power on the MAPS-module couldn´t establish a connection to the MPK.
Selector fault, MAPS-List-FIFO [S]
Explanation : Due to insufficient MAPS-RAM, the allocation of the MAPS-FIFOs wasn´t accomplished.
Selector fault, MAPS-rcv.-overflow [S]
Selector fault, MAPS-receive-collis. [S]
Selector fault, MAPS-timeout [S]
Selector fault, Miscount [F]
Explanation : A wrong order of impulses was detected during decellaration.
Possib. Cause : check impulse-magnets and switches « Up » and « Down » ; check zone-magnets and switches ; check the setting of
impuls order in the MPK-menue
selector fault, missed DSK-zone [F]
Explanation : The zone signal was not recognized by the MDSK print.
Possib. Cause : zone switch defect ; check zone signal to the MDSK print ; check wiring to the MDSK print
selector fault, more than 24/60 levels [F]
Explanation : More than 24/60 floors were recognized during the learning journey.
Possib. Cause : check the zone signal to the MDSK print ; check connections to the MDSK print
selector fault, more than 60 levels [F]
Explanation : More than 60 floors were recognized during the learning journey.
Possib. Cause : check the zone signal to the MDSK print ; check connections to the MDSK print
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 17.06.2011 / [F]: Fault; [M]: Message; [S]: System I – A / 11
MPK 400
Event log entries
selector fault, MPK-timeout [S]

Selector fault, no correction above [F]
Explanation : The upper correction switch was not recognized due to a counter error during up travel.
Possib. Cause : check the shaft signals in the upper correction zone ; check counter impulses ; magnet switch defect
selector fault, no correction below [F]
Explanation : The lower correction switch was not recognized due to a counter error during down travel.
Possib. Cause : check the shaft signals in the lower correction zone ; check counter impulses ; magnet switch defect
selector fault, no count signal [F]
Explanation : No incrementer signals were recognized during learning travel.
Possib. Cause : check wiring to the MDSK print ; check polarity of the incrementer signals
selector fault, no DSK-loader [S]
Explanation : The boot loader program on the SEM-DSK-module is faulty or not present.
Selector fault, no Level Values [F]
Explanation : No level values were recognized during the learning travel.
Possib. Cause : absolute encoder defect ; check connections of the absolute encoder
selector fault, no MAPS-loader [S]
Explanation : The boot loader program on the MAPS-module is faulty or not present.
Selector fault, no prelimit bottom [F]
Explanation : The prelimit switch bottom was not recognized by the controller on travelling down.
Possib. Cause : Check shaft signals at the lower shaft area ; check the deceleration- and count-signals ; magnet switch defect
selector fault, no zone at end floor [F]
Explanation : After stopping the lift at an end floor during learning travel the car isn´t standing at the zone.
Possib. Cause : zone switch defect ; zone switch is bouncing ; check zone signal to the MDSK print ; check wiring to the MDSK print
selector fault, no zone signal [F]
Explanation : No zone signal was recognized during the learning travel.
Possib. Cause : zone switch defect ; check zone signal to the MDSK print ; check wiring to the MDSK print
selector fault, opposite direc. Level [F]
Explanation : The level signal of the opposite direction is not available at arrival.
Possib. Cause : Check impulses, sequence of impulse in the menu of MPK, magnetic switch defect
selector fault, pre. Location msg. 1 [S]
Explanation : The MAPS-module didn´t supply a valid preliminary level information.
Selector fault, pre. Location msg. 2 [S]
Explanation : The actual preliminary level information supplied by the MAPS-module couldn´t be read by the MPK.
Selector fault, pre. Location msg. 3 [S]
Explanation : Due to insufficient MPK-RAM, there is no preliminary MAPS-level information available.
Possib. Cause : Check program configuration of the MPK ; Check hardware of the MPK.
Selector fault, Readout Over-run [F]
Explanation : The SEM-DSK-Module announces that the count-module has detected a readout over-run.
Possib. Cause : Check incrementer and wiring ; SEM-DSK-module defect
selector fault, receive list [S]
Selector fault, receive overflow [S]
Selector fault, receive-collision [S]
Explanation : The communication between MPK and MDSK- respectively MAPS-module was cut off.
Possib. Cause : Check if the MDSK- respectively the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
Selector fault, reset requested [S]
Selector fault, send list [S]
Selector fault, speed-monitoring [F]
Explanation : DCP4-speed-monitoring at upper or lower floor has triggered.
Possib. Cause : Check regulator set-up ; Check switch S19 ´Speed-Monitoring´ ; Check drive
MPK 400
Event log entries
selector fault, start monitor [F]

Explanation: The incrementer rotation direction monitor was triggered.
Possib. cause: check setting of drive and regulator
selector fault, top correct. defect [F]
Explanation: The top correction switch was recognized in down travel at a level which is not the top or bottom floor.
Possib. cause: check shaft signals of the top correction; magnet switch defect
selector fault, travel hight change [F]
Explanation: The travel hight has changed by more than one meter without a new learning journey.
Possib. cause: Setting of the travel hight has been changed.
selector fault, travel hight wrong [F]
Explanation: The travel hight has not been set.
Possib. cause: Check setting of travel distance in menu "basic settings".
selector fault, write DPRAM [S]
Explanation: The communication between MPK and MDSK- respectively MAPS-module was cut off.
Possib. cause: Check if the MDSK- respectively the MAPS-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, write DSK-DPRAM [S]
Explanation: The communication between MPK and SEM-DSK-module was cut off.
Possib. cause: Check if the SEM-DSK-module is plugged correctly to the MPK.
selector fault, write MAPS-DPRAM [S]
selector fault, zone no. search [F]
Explanation: During the learning journey a wrong swquence of zones was recognized.
Possib. cause: zone switch defect; check zone signal to the MDSK print check wiring to the MDSK print
slowdown monitoring, input has tripped [F]
Explanation: The slowdown monitoring module registered a fault.
Possib. cause: Check slowdown monitor module; Check regulator set-up; Check drive; Check selector informations
Stuck Button Detect, Car Calls [F]
Explanation: The terminal for car calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
Possib. cause: Shorted input-terminal (at 24V) or the button has been stuck
Stuck Button Detect, Disabled Call [F]
Explanation: The terminal for disabled calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
Stuck Button Detect, Down Call [F]
Explanation: The terminal for down calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
Stuck Button Detect, Emergency Travel [F]
Explanation: The terminal for emergency travel calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
Stuck Button Detect, Ext.L.Calls Dn [F]
Explanation: The terminal for extended down calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
Stuck Button Detect, Ext.L.Calls Up [F]
Explanation: The terminal for extended up calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
Stuck Button Detect, Landing Priority [F]
Explanation: The terminal for priority calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
Stuck Button Detect, Porter Priority [F]
Stuck Button Detect, Special Priority [F]
Stuck Button Detect, Up Call [F]
Explanation: The terminal for up calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
Stuck Button Detect, VIP Travel [F]
Explanation: The terminal for VIP Travel calls and the floor and door specified in line 4 of the display detect always 24V.
system-fault, Faulty Component [F]
Explanation: Wrong controler components.
Possib. cause: Use only components with the same producer-no.(BST-LPK´s, Network-modules).
MPK 400
Event log entries
Thermistor (motor), has tripped [F]

Explanation : The motor thermistor has tripped.
Possib. Cause : motor overheated
time out, brake monitoring [F]
Explanation : The terminal of the brake monitoring has been activated.
Possib. Cause : Check the brake and the contacts of the brake monitoring system
time out, brake monitoring 1 [F]
Explanation : The terminal of the brake monitoring 1 has been activated.
time out, contactor monitor [F]
Explanation : The main contactor monitor has been activated.
Possib. Cause : main contactor defect ; main contactor contact failure
time out, door monitor [F]
Explanation : The time out of the door monitoring has been reached.
Possib. Cause : Check the 2nd door contact ; check the settings for the door monitoring time out
time out, remote-connection [F]
Explanation : The remote-connection has been interrupted.
Possib. Cause : Check the remote settings at the MPK ; check the terminals and the wiring at the remote PC and at the MPK.
Timed out, bolt activating [F]

Explanation : The limit switch position ´Bolt Limit Sw. Activ´ wasn´t reached in the designated time.
Possib. Cause : check the setting of the designated time ; check bolts ; check input ´Bolt Limit Sw. Activ´ and the connected switch(es)
timed out, bolt deactivating [F]
Explanation : The limit switch position ´Bolt Limit Sw. Deact´ wasn´t reached in the designated time.
Possib. Cause : check the setting of the designated time ; check bolts ; check input ´Bolt Limit Sw. Deact´ and the connected switch(es)
timed out, Brake Signal aft. Arriv. [F]
Explanation : The signal « electrical stop » from the regulator did not become inactive after arrival during the set time.
timed out, Brake Signal lost [F]
Explanation : The signal « electrical stop » from the regulator became active when stationary.
Explanation : The signal « electrical stop » from the regulator became inactive in travel.
Explanation : The signal « electrical stop » from the regulator become inactive before the controller stops the drive.
timed out, Car Module-Monitor [F]
Explanation : No car module is identified in the SLON-net.
timed out, Deceleration time monitor [F]
Explanation : The set decelleration time has been exceeded.
Possib. Cause : check floor level switch impulses ; check monitor time setting ; magnet switch defect
timed out, inverter enable [F]
Explanation : The signal « inverter enable » was not identified in the check time. The signal « inverter enable » was cut off in travel or re-
levelling.
Possib. Cause : Check inverter, check signal-connection to the inverter.
Timed out, MPK Input Data Fault [S]
Explanation : The MPK had received faulty messages at least for 150ms or longer.
timed out, Reg. InputData Fault [S]
Explanation : The regulator had received faulty messages at least for 150ms or longer.
MAPS hardware
MPK 400
Event log entries
timed out, Regulator Connection [S]

Explanation: The MPK and the regulator had received faulty messages at least for 150ms or longer.
Possib. cause: Faulty data line beetween MPK and the regulator; check the shielding of the chopper power supply; check the shielding of
the data line; check the shielding of the motor power supply; faulty regulator hardware; faulty MPK hardware; faulty MAPS
hardware
timed out, Regulator Connection [F]
Explanation: The serial connection between MPK and the regulator had or has been cut off.
Possib. cause: Regulator has been turned off; faulty or non-present data line beetween MPK and the regulator; exchange terminal link 87
and terminal link 88; check the shielding of the chopper power supply; check the shielding of the data line; check the
shielding of the motor power supply; faulty regulator hardware; faulty MPK hardware; faulty MAPS hardware
timed out, regulator fault [F]
Explanation: The supervisory contact of the regulator has tripped.
Possib. cause: check setting of the regulator
timed out, runing time monitor [F]
Explanation: The set running time has been exceeded.
Possib. cause: check monitor time setting; magnet switch defect
timed out, safety photocell [F]
Explanation: The supervision of the saftey photocell was active at the start of travel.
Possib. cause: Saftey photocell is defect or blocked.
timed out, safety photocell 1 [F]
Explanation: The supervision of the saftey photocell 1 was active at the start of travel.
Possib. cause: Saftey photocell 1 is defect or blocked.
timed out, safety photocell 2 [F]
Explanation: The supervision of the saftey photocell 2 was active at the start of travel.
Possib. cause: Saftey photocell 2 is defect or blocked.
timed out, start time monitor [F]
Explanation: The set starting time has been exceeded.
Possib. cause: check monitor time setting; check floor level switch impulses; level impulses set too long; magnet switch defect
timed out, trav. bolt activatio [F]
Explanation: The bolt reversal area to activate the bolts of the pawl device wasn´t reached in the designated time.
Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check motor; check pawl device mechanics;
timed out, trav. bolt deactivat [F]
Explanation: The bolt reversal area to deactivate the bolts of the pawl device wasn´t reached in the designated time.
Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check motor; check pawl device mechanics;
timed out, trav. low pressure [F]
Explanation: The low pressure equalization of the pawl device wasn´t completeted in the designated time.
Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check motor; check pawl device mechanics; check input ´Low Press. Pawl Dev.´
and the connected switch
timed out, trav. safe.circ. pawl dev. [M]
Explanation: The input ´Safe.Circ. Pawl Dev.´ didn´t become active within one second after the bolts were deactiveted.
Possib. cause: check pawl device mechanics; check input ´Safe.Circ. Pawl Dev.´ and the connected switch
timed out, trav. touchdown area [F]
Explanation: The touch down area of the pawl device wasn´t reached in the designated time.
Possib. cause: check the setting of the designated time; check motor; check pawl device mechanics; check input ´Touchdown active´ and
the connected switch
timed out, travel lock [F]
Explanation: The start of travel was blocked for more then 30 secounds.
Possib. cause: -
travel interrupted, travel lock [F]
Explanation: The input "travel lock" was identified while the travel.
Possib. cause: Another lift ignored the travel lock.
Universal Input ´fully configurable text ´ [F]
Possib. cause: Check the module/sensor, which is connected to the universal input.
voltage monitoring, light voltage [M]
Explanation: The supervision of the light voltage is active.
Possib. cause: Check the power supply of the light voltage.
voltage monitoring, main current activ [M]
Explanation: The supervision of the main current announces the return of the main current after an previous loss of it.
Possib. cause: -
voltage monitoring, main current deactiv [M]
Explanation: The supervision of the main current announces the loss of the main current.
Possib. cause: Check power supply of the main circuit.
voltage monitoring, motor signals [M]
Explanation: The output motor signals supply to the drive extension module has been interrupted.
Possib. cause: check the control voltage supply to the drive extension module; check the wiring
MPK 400
Event log entries
voltage monitoring, Outp. Overl. A1 - A8 [M]

Explanation: The power supply for the output has been interrupted.
Possib. cause: short circuit in the 24V supply; check shaft wiring
voltage monitoring, short circ. term. 200 [M]
Explanation: The controller voltage monitor has tripped.
Explanation: The voltage monitor of the car has tripped.
Explanation: The voltage monitor of the calls or output terminals has tripped.
MPK 400
Operation status
active for em. power

Explanation: The lift remains in service on emergency power
appl. loader
Explanation: Softwareupdate for the modules is active.
at bottom floor
Explanation: Indication that a hydraulic lift is at the home landing.
at check floor
Explanation: The lift has reached a check floor. A journey to check floor is only initiated when input "shutdown light off" is set.
at em. power floor
Explanation: The pre-set emergency power floor has been reached.
At fire evacu. floor
Explanation: The pre-set fire evacu. floor has been reached.
at homing floor
Explanation: The lift has reached the homing floor. A journey to a homing floor is only initiated when the input "shutdown light off" is set.
at parking floor
Explanation: Arrival at the parking floor is indicated.
at readiness floor
Explanation: The lift has reached the designated readiness floor.
Attendant Operator
Explanation: The lift is operating under the control of an attendant.
autom. function test
Explanation: The function tests are running.
bed trav. car
Explanation: The lift is handling a bed transport car call.
bed trav. landing
Explanation: The lift is handling a bed transport landing call.
BLOCKED
Explanation: Due to a major fault operation of the lift is blocked.
bottom floor return
Explanation: The homing journey for a hydraulic lift has been initiated.
Bus Stop
Explanation: Bus Stop travel is active.
car calls blocking
Explanation: All car calls are blocked because of the activated input ćar calls blocking´.
Car Module-Monitor
Explanation: The connection to the car module is interrupted (SLON).
card-fault
Explanation: The abscence or failure of a print has been detected.
cold weather start
Explanation: The cold weather operation is active. (only hydr. lift)
construction operation
Explanation: The construction operation is active.
contactor monitor
Explanation: The contactor monitor has tripped.
control voltage
Explanation: The control voltage of the safety circuit is missing.
correction travel
Explanation: Due to missing or false floor information a correction travel is initiated.
Disabled Travel
Explanation: The lift is handling a disabled call in the priority-mode.
door blocking
Explanation: The setting "service operation doors closed" is activated. Door reversal is inhibited.
door commission
Explanation: The door commission sets the location for the DLON-Reader-R/F-modules.
door hold time runs
Explanation: The door hold time runs.
doors closing
Explanation: The lift waits for the doors to close prior to down travel.
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 17.06.2011 I–B/1

MPK 400
Operation status
Down Peak Traffic

Explanation: The traffic pattern down peak is active.
Emer. Bottom floor ret.
Explanation: The hydr. Lift drives to the bottom floor and switched off at the bottom floor. (Cause: critical fault)
emerg. Limit switch
Explanation: The contact of the upper terminal limit switch has been operated (monitored only on hydraulic lifts). The primary safety circuit is
interrupted.
Emerg. Power contr.
Explanation: The emergency power control is active.
Emerg. Stop active
Explanation: An emergency stop has been operated.
Emergency travel
Explanation: Emergency travel is active.
Emergency travel floor reached
Explanation: The emergency travel floor has been reached.
Fire detector active
Explanation: At least one fire detector input is active.
Fire evacu. Service
Explanation: The fire evacu. Service is active.
Firemans control int.
Explanation: Lift in use by the fire service. Only car calls are available.
Firemans control out
Explanation: The lift has been recalled to the preset firemans recall floor.
Floor commission
Explanation: The floor commission is active. It sets the location of the floor modules.
Focal Point Service
Explanation: The Focal Point Service, detected by traffic pattern with traffic analysis, was activated.
Focal Point Travel
Explanation: The car starts the travel to the focal point, detected by traffic pattern with traffic analysis.
Full Load
Explanation: The load weighting system signals a fully loaded car.
Function activation
Explanation: A remote control function is active, e.g. remote control for connection superv.
Inspection operation
Explanation: The inspection operation is active.
Land. Infrared act.
Explanation: The operation of the lobby monitor is indicated.
Landing Calls Block.
Explanation: All landing calls are blocked because of the activated input ´Landing Calls Block.´.
landing control off
Explanation: The lift has been isolated from landing calls.
Learn trav. Is active
Explanation: A learning travel has been initiated.
Learn trav. Not valid
Explanation: The controller has no valid shaft information und remains blocked until a learning travel is initiated.
Learning operation
Explanation: The manual APS learning operation is active.
Lift ready to travel
Explanation: There are no travel commands in the system at present.
LRV contact inactive
Explanation: The regulator supersisory contact has tripped.
Maintenance
Explanation: The free progr. Input “maintenance” is active and/or in the menue Testing/Maintenance, Presetting the function “save events” has
the value “NO”.
minimum load
Explanation: The load weighting system signals minimum load in the car.
Modem fault
Explanation: The modem operation is troubled. See event log entry.
I–B/2 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 17.06.2011

MPK 400
Operation status
MPKEasy is active
Explanation: MPKEasy sends parameter to the controller.
no selector position
Explanation: At this time the controller has no floor level information. A correction journey is required prior to the next command being
answered.
nudging
Explanation: An odligatory doors close signal has been activated.
overload
Explanation: The load weighting system signals a overloaded car.
parking timer runs
Explanation: The pre-set parking timer is running.
parking travel
Explanation: The lift is travelling to the parking floor.
photocell blocked
Explanation: The photocell has become blocked in down travel.
power save level 1
Explanation: The operation status "power safe level 1" is active in the following cases:
1) A activation time for "power safe level 1" was set in the menu and this time is elapsed and "power safe level 2" is inactive and
there is no call in the system. During "power safe level 2" the following components are switched off: indicators, cabine fan and
cabine light. Other externe components can be switched off by using the output ""power safe level 1".
2) The input "power safe mode" is active. In this case the lift only travels with the speeds v1 and v0.
3) The "power safe mode" was activated via remote monitoring. In this case the lift only travels with the speeds v1 and v0.
4) Emergency power is active and the lift identifies the DCP emergency power information for reduced speed. In this case the lift
only travels with the speeds v1 and v0.
power save level 2
Explanation: The operation status "power safe level 2" is active when "power safe level 2" is active. During "power safe level 2" the following
components are switched off: indicators, cabine fan and cabine light. Other externe components can be switched off by using the
outputs ""power safe level 1" and "power safe level 2".
power save mode
Explanation: During "power safe mode" the lift only travels with the speeds v1 resp. v0.
Primary Safety Circ.
Explanation: The primary safety circuit is interrupted.
priority trav. land.
Explanation: The lift is handling a landing priority call.
priority travel car
Explanation: The lift ist handling a car priority call.
random call
Explanation: the random cal programme is active.
readiness service
Explanation: The readiness service has been initiated.
Regulator Connection
Explanation: The serial data link to the regulator is cut off.
regulator fault
Explanation: The supervisory contact of the regulator has tripped.
regulator prewarning
Explanation: The regulator informs the controller about a critical module temperature. (only DCP-connection)
relevelling
Explanation: Relevelling is active.
remote control fault
Explanation: The remote control connection to the office is disconnected.
remote set-up
Explanation: The remote set-up is activated via remote control. The set-up via menu is not possible.
return to group
Explanation: The lift returns to the group after a fault.
safety circuit
Explanation: The safety circuit has tripped.
safety circuit
Explanation: The control voltage of the safety circuit is interrupted.
safety photocell
Explanation: The safety photocell has tripped.
Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 17.06.2011 I–B/3

MPK 400
Operation status
Shutdown Light Off

Explanation: The lift service has been switched off and will become non-operational when at the designated floor.
test panel control operation
Explanation: The test panel control operation is active.
thermistor
Explanation: Overheating of the drive system or hydraulic oil has been registered.
touchdown
Explanation: Touchdown is active.
travel interrupt
Explanation: Travel terminates at the next landing due to special circumstances (i.e. priority travel,landing call isolation, etc.)
travel lock
Explanation: The input "travel lock input" is active.
travel to level: (no.)
Explanation: Normal command processing takes place. The next destination is indicated.
universal input
Up Peak Traffic
Explanation: The traffic pattern up peak is active.
vehicle transport
Explanation: Vehicle transport mode is active.
VIP floor reached
Explanation: The VIP floor has been reached.
VIP travel
Explanation: VIP travel is active.
voltage monitoring
Explanation: The procesor voltage monitor has tripped.
waiting for car call
Explanation: After operation of the emergency stop or interruptions to the safety photocell the lift waits for a car call to initiate release to travel.
I–B/4 Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 17.06.2011

MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist

Telefon +49 (0) 221 89 85 0 Chester, Cheshire, CH4 9QP
Telefax +49 (0) 221 89 85 30 Telephone + 44 (0) 1244-67 85 49
Email info@kollmorgen.de Email info@kollmorgen.co.uk
KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 07.09.2006 / DO_FV4DH_GB

MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
Contents
1 Function list............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 Description of the notices in the function lists.......................................................................................................................................................................3
2 Indicator modules ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Selfdefined indicators .............................................................................................................................................................................................................5
3 Short floor distances............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
4 Ring control emergency power drive ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6
5 Parking floor external: time intervals ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6
6 Door blocking: time intervals ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
7 Power safe level 2: timeintervals............................................................................................................................................................................ 6
8 Traffic pattern: time intervals ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
9 Remote monitoring ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
10 Selective user control ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
11 Special travels ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
12 Code numbers ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
07.09.2006 II / 2
MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
1 Function list
1.1 Description of the notices in the function lists
[1] With setting traction an immediate blocking occurs

[2] Only autom. doors with limit switches / swing doors with limit switches
[3] Only autom. doors without limit switches / swing doors without limit switches / swing doors without car doors
[4] Only with group-interface.
[5] Only without group-interface.
[6] Only considered by <<fire evacuation service>> or <<readiness travel>> with free programmable input.
[7] The value for the distance of the reference-point will be corrected after the learning travel (cause: encoder-resolution).
[8] DSK: The value for the relevelling-points will be corrected after the learning travel (cause: encoder-resolution).
[9] From prg. Version LIFT4h1.28: 3 doorsides available (MPK400)
[fl] The function is active only on the preset floor.
[T] The next table contains a selection of abbreviation of the menu:
Menu Explanation Menu Explanation

firef.ctrl.ext auto. [T] firefighting control extern automatic port.trav.fl.reached [T] porter travel floor reached
VIP tavel ena. int. [T] VIP travel enable intern Accep.ContactRib.Fl. [T] accept contact ribbon floor
contact rib.Fl. [T] contact ribbon floor spec.trav.fl.reached [T] special travel floor reached
StartDir.EM.Pow.Trav [T] start direction emergency power travel contact rib.Fl. [T] contact ribbon floor
grpsplit land. calls [T] groupsplit landing calls Accep.ContactRib.Fl. [T] accept contact ribbon floor
grpsplit prio. calls [T] groupsplit priority calls empty cab. port.prio [T] empty cabine porter priority
grpsplit bed transp. [T] groupsplit bed transport empty cab. spec.prio [T] empty cabine special priority
grpsplit ext.lndcall [T] groupsplit extended landing calls Land.Prio. CarModTim [T] landing priority car mode time
grpsplit portpriocal [T] groupsplit porter priority calls Land.Prio.MaxCarCall [T] landing priority maximum car call
grpsplit specpriocal [T] groupsplit special priority calls Port.Prio. CarModTim [T] porter priority car mode time
DWN-Ar./Hall Lantern [T] DOWN-Arrow / Hall Lantern Port.Prio.MaxCarCall [T] porter priority maximum car call
UP-Ar./Hall Lantern [T] UP-Arrow / Hall Lantern spec.priority-ready [T] special priority readiness
Fault auto. Func.test [T] fault automatic function test Spec.Prio. Car Mode [T] special priority car mode
EM.Power Trav. fail. [T] Emergency power travel failure Spec.Prio. CarModTim [T] special priority car mode time
EM.Pow.Sequence done [T] Emergency power sequence done Spec.Prio.MaxCarCall [T] special priority maximum car call
07.09.2006 II / 3
MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
2 Indicator modules
Module
Display Location
selfdefined
Binary
1 to N
Additional
Graycode
Invert. Graycode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...
E 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...
U E 1 2 3 4 5 ...
K E 0 1 2 3 4 ...
K E 1 2 3 4 5 ....
U2 U1 E 1 2 3 ...
-1 0 1 2 3 4 ...
- 1 1 2 3 4 5 ...
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 ...
-2 -1 1 2 3 4 5 ...
P 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...
For the settings of the indicator module KBI (system MPK 400 / KSB) please read the
<<System documentation / Kollmorgen Shaftbus (KSB)>>.
07.09.2006 II / 4
MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
2.1 Selfdefined indicators

Module: Location:
Floor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Display
Code
Floor 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Display
Code
Floor 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Display
Code
Floor 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Display
Code
3 Short floor distances

Start speed for travel to the next floor
From floor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
To floor 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
V fast with normal impuls
V intermed. with intemed. impuls
V slow without additional impuls
From floor 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
To floor 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
V fast with normal impuls
V intermed. with intemed. impuls
V slow without additional impuls
07.09.2006 II / 5
MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
4 Ring control emergency power drive

Example: sequence of the emergency power drive:
Lift-No. 2, Lift-No. 4, Lift-No.8 , Lift-No.7 , Lift-No.6 , Lift-No.5 , Lift-No.1 , Lift-No. 3
Sequence 1. Lift 2. Lift 3. Lift 4. Lift 5. Lift 6. Lift 7. Lift 8. Lift

Group-/Lift-No. 2 4 8 7 6 5 1 3
5 Parking floor external: time intervals

45 15
Example: The floor 6 is from 11 am to 12 pm the actual parking floor.
Interval - number Floor ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm)

1 6 11:45 12:15
6 Door blocking: time intervals

01 25 00 30
Example: On floor 1 is the first door side blocked from 0 am to 5 am and from 12 am to 13 pm.
Door side 1 Door side 2

Interval 1 Interval 2 Interval 1 Interval 2
Floor ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm)
1 00:01 05:25 12:00 13:30
7 Power safe level 2: timeintervals

Example: Power safe level 2 Monday to Thursday from 8:00 pm to 5:25 am active. (max. 10 intervals)
Interval On (Day hh:mm) Off (Day hh:mm) Interval On (Day hh:mm) Off (Day hh:mm)
1 Mo. 20:00 Tu 05:25 2 Tu. 20:00 We. 05:25
3 We. 20:00 Th. 05:25 4 Th. 20:00 Fr. 05:25
5 6 ... 10
07.09.2006 II / 6
MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
8 Traffic pattern: time intervals

15 00 55 15
Example: From 07 am to 08 am is the function ”time interval up peak” active; from 11 am to 12 pm is the function ”time interval down peak” active.
Time interval up peak Time interval down peak

Interval – Number ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm) ON (hh:mm) OFF (hh:mm)
1 07:15 08:00 11:55 12:15
9 Remote monitoring
Number of Type of char. Default setup Setup
digits
remote monitor ID 7 0..9 A..Z Empty
telephone no. modem PC 20 0..9, space Empty
modem configuration 20 0..9 A..Z, space special char. T0
modem basic configuration 20 0..9 A..Z, space special char. X3
* Select konfiguration according to your modemmanual
Example:
Setup
remote monitor ID AF77029
telephone no. modem PC 07221 2011
modem configuration T0
modem basic configuration X3 S0=0
07.09.2006 II / 7
MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
10 Selective user control

Door side 1 Door side 2 Door side 3
Floor User User User User User User User User User User User User
group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4 group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4 group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4
Notice: The pre-setting on every level and on every door side is ”inactive”.
You can choose only one user group for a level /door side.
The activation of the selective user control requires the minimum of one entry of a user group to one door side or floor.
07.09.2006 II / 8
MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
11 Special travels
Floors Doors
All values Standard setup Setup Door 1 & 2 Door 1 Door 2 Door 3
Readiness floor (with free progr. input) Next floor (2.07), Next floor X*
1 ... n
Fire evacuation floor (with free progr. input) 1 ... n 1 X*
2. Fire evacuation floor (with free progr. input) Inactive, 1 ... n Inactive X*
Fire fighting floor 1 ... n 1 X*
Emergency power floor Next floor, 1 ... n Next floor X*
Survey floor Inactive, 1 ... n Inactive X*
* preset (only by one door sides)
Notice: The suppositions for the selection of a door side are:
- the foor setting is ”selective doors” (main menue: ”basic setting” ->”door entr.”)
- 2 door sides exist at the floor
You can´t change the setting for the door, if:
- only 1 door side exists

- opposite doors and both doors are existing at the floor
- a door is blocked at the floor
Example: Readiness floor: floor 2 and door 2 opens on arrival (only available by „selektive doors” at this floor).
Fire evacuation floor: floor 2 and doors 1 & 2 open on arrival
fire fighting floor: floor 2 and doors 1 & 2 open on arrival
emergency power floor: next floor and door 1 opens on arrival
Floors Doors
All values Standard setup Setup Door 1 & 2 Door 1 Door 2 Door 3
Readiness floor (with free progr. input) Next floor, 1 ... n Next floor 2 X
Fire evacuation floor (with free progr. Input) 1 ... n 1 2 X
Fire fighting floor 1 ... n 1 2 X
Emergency power floor Next floor, 1 ... n Next floor Next floor X
07.09.2006 II / 9
MPK 40 / 400
Functionlist
12 Code numbers
Lift No. / Code

Lift
Company
Location
Control Number
Name Date
Code No. : set

Code No. : modified
Code No. : modified
Code No. : modified
Code No. : modified
Code No. : modified
Attention ! Important document ! Not to be left in the controller

Return data sheet with code numbers to the service department
1. Code-No. 2. Code-No. 3. Code-No. 1. Code-No. 2. Code-No. 3. Code-No.

Tech. engineer 1 Serv. engineer 2
Tech. engineer 2 Remote interr.e
Serv. engineer 1 Service-office
07.09.2006 II / 10
MPK 40
Functionlist from prg. version 2.07
Main-/Submenu Function Prgv. wn. Int. Default set-up All values

information operation status 1.00 - - - -
information, event log display events 1.00 - - - -
information, event log clear events 1.00 - - - -
information, event log print events 1.00 - - - -
information, event log current event print 1.00 S - no yes, no
information, event log display system events 1.00 - - - -
information, event log clear system events 1.00 - - - -
information parameter print 1.00 - - - -
information, test module BST-IOs 1.00 - - - -
information, test module net-IOs 1.00 - - - -
information BST-res. outp. term. 1.00 - - - -
information BST-res. input term. 1.00 - - - -
information net-terminal-setup 1.00 - - - -
information, network diagnosis trouble 1.00 - - - -
information, remote monitoring Installation-ID 2.00 - - - -
information, remote monitoring Remote Monitoring-ID 2.05 - - - -
information, remote monitoring state of connection 2.00 - - - -
information, trip counter display 1.00 - - - -
information, trip counter clear 1.00 - - - -
information, trip counter intervall 1.00 - - 0 0...999.999.999
information, running time counter display 1.00 - - - -
information, running time counter clear 1.00 - - - -
information, running time counter interval 1.00 - - 0h 0 h....60.000 h
information, lift / control no. set controller no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. clear controller no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. set lift no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. clear lift no. 1.00 - - - -
information date/time display 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. lift ... 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. operating system 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. menu program 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. modulesoftware 1.00 - - - -
see/give calls ok for call at lowest floor 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls ok for call at top floor 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls floor 1 - ... 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program car calls 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program landing calls down 1.00 S - - -
code no. user log off 1.00 - - - -
code no. user log on 1.00 - - - -
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.1; * default set-up see “technical description” II – A / 1
MPK 40

code no. user identity 1.00 - - - -
code no. edit 1.00 - - - -
code no. automatic user log off 1.00 S - yes yes, no
basic settings, lift no. of stops 1.00 R 1 2 2 - 8 stops
basic settings, lift no. of car doors 1.00 R 1 1 1, 2
basic settings, lift table of entrances 1.00 R - autom. with limit (autom. w./without limit sw., manual gates (1.36),swing doors witho.
sw./syncronised doors limit sw, swing doors witho. car door, no door), (syncronised doors)
basic settings, lift type of selector 1.00 R - simple shaft copier simple shaft copier (not to change)
basic settings, lift drive type 1.00 R - hydraulic AC unregulated, hydraulic
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, alarm 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, brake monitoring 1 1.22 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, brake monitoring 2 1.22 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, close limit sw. Do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, cold weather start 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, completion testing 1.43 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, correction bottom BST 1.45 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, correction top BST 1.45 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, do. close push do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, do. open push do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, door monitor 1.22 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Emergency Electrical Operation 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Emergency Electrical Operation down 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Emergency Electrical Operation up 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fan push button 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fire evacuation service 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, firefight. Ctrl. Ext. 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, firefight. Ctrl. Int. 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fulload 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Inspection Fast 1.35 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, landing conrol off 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, landing superv. Ctrl. Do.[9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, leveltest 1.22 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, light voltage 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Main Current 1.34 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, open limit sw. Do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, overload 1.09 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, photocell do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, prelimit switch- top 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, prelimit switch-bot 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
MPK 40

basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, press. Contact do.[9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, priority travel car 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, releveling sw. Down 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, releveling sw. Up 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Safety Module 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, safety photocell 1 2.05 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, safety photocell 2 2.05 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, travel lock input 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 1 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Zone Safety Module 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, zone switch S71 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, zone switch S72 1.00 R - - E2 – E8
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, alarm misusage 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at bottom floor 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at fire evacuation floor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at parking floor 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bottom floor return 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bridge S10 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car gong 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car gong down 1.35 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car gong up 1.35 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, coll. Fault registr. 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 1 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, do. cntr. Close do. [9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, do. cntr. Open do. [9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault closing 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault message 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault opening 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
MPK 40

basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, doors close command 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, down-arrow 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fan output 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Fault auto. Func.test 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fire evacu. Travel 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, firefight fl. Reach. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fulload 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, hall lantern down 1.29 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, hall lantern up 1.29 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, in-use-light 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, journey time monitor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Maintenance 1.40 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, motor thermistor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, motor ventilation 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, no selector position 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, nudging sig.do. [9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, nudging. Do.[9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out Call-Request 1.38 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out fire evacuation service 1.08 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out of service 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Outp. Remote Command 1.35 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall land. Priority 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overload 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, parking travel 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Prim. Safe. Circ. Fault 1.34 R - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, relev./decellerate 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, relevelling 1.02 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, retiring cam 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, safety photocell test 1.47 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Speed v0 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, test alarm button 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, test butt. Door open 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel 1.06 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel lock output 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel requirement 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 1 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
MPK 40

basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, up-arrow 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, valve control 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, v-fast 1.02 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, alarm 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, brake monitoring 1 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, brake monitoring 2 1.22 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, close limit sw. Do. [9] 1.00 R - -* E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, cold weather start 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, completion testing 1.41 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, do. close push do. [9] 1.00 R - -* E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, do. open push do. [9] 1.00 R - -* E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, door monitor 1.22 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emergency electrical operation 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emergency electrical operation down 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emergency electrical operation up 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fan push button 1.00 R - -* E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fire evacu. Service 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, firefight. Ctrl. Ext. 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, firefight. Ctrl. Int. 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fulload 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, inspection fast 1.35 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, landing control off 1.00 R - -* E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, landing superv. Ctrl. Do. [9] 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, level test 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, light voltage 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, main current 1.34 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, open limit sw. Do. [9] 1.00 R - -* E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, photocell do. [9] 1.02 R - -* E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, prelimit switch- bot 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, prelimit switch-top 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, press contact do. [9] 1.00 R - -* E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, priority travel car 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, releveling sw. Down 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, releveling sw. Up 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, safety module 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, safety photocell 1 2.05 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, safety photocell 2 2.05 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
MPK 40

basic settings, MPK-control net-input, travel lock input 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 1 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, zone safety module 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, zone switch S71 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, zone switch S72 1.00 R - - E1 – E8, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, alarm misusage 1.40 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at bottom floor 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at fire evacu. Floor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at parking floor 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, bottom floor return 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, bridge S10 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car gong 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car gong down 1.35 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car gong up 1.35 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, coll. Fault registr. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 1 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, do. contr. Close do. [9] 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, do. contr. Open do. [9] 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault closing 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault message 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault opening 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, doors close command 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, down-arrow 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fan output 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Fault auto. Func.test 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fire evacu. Travel 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fire fight fl. Reach. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fulload 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall lantern down 1.26 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
MPK 40

basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall lantern up 1.26 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, in-use-light 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, journey time monitor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Maintenance 1.40 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, motor ventilation 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, no selector position 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, nudging do. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, nudging sig. Door 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out Call-Request 1.38 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out fire evac. Serv. 1.08 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out of service 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Outp. Remote Command 1.35 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall land. Priority 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overload 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, parking travel 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Prim. Safe. Circ. Fault 1.34 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, PTC output (motor) 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Retiring Cam 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, safety photocell test 1.47 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, test alarm button 1.01 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, test door open butt. 1.01 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, travel 1.06 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, travel lock output 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, travel requirement 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 1 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, up-arrow 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, valve control 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, D1 – D8, TA1, TA2
basic settings, MPK-control net-term.-release 1.19 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control set time 1.00 S - hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss
basic settings, MPK-control daylight savingtime 1.00 R - yes yes, no
basic settings, MPK-control display line 1 1.00 S - - 0-9/a-z/A-Z/ special symbols (see function list: normal indicator)
basic settings, MPK-control data-interface a 1.00 R - MPKEasy not used, printer/terminal, terminal, MPKEasy, VisualLift w. modem
(2.00), VisualLift w/o modem (2.00)
basic settings, MPK-control transmission rate a 1.00 R - 19200/8/N/1 19200/8/N/1 (1.19), 9600/8/N/1, 4800/8/N/1, 2400/8/N/1, 1200/8/N/1,
600/8/N/1, 300/8/N/1
MPK 40

basic settings, MPK-control language 1.00 R - deutsch deutsch, english, swenska, nederlands, polski, espanol
basic settings, MPK-control switch on delay 1.00 R 1s 2s ínactive´ ... 15 s
basic settings, MPK-control construction-operation 1.22 R - no yes, no
settings, doors in general door open trigger 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s ...2,0 s
settings, doors in general lock delayed on 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s...2,0 s
settings, doors in general lock bounce timer 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s ...2,0 s
settings, doors in general lock delayed off 1.18 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s .... 10,0 s
settings, doors in general lock fault monitor 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general lock fault monitor delay 1.00 S 1s 7s 5 s ...60 s
settings, doors in general at the parking floor 1.00 NF - open and close (since 1.40) opened, closed, open and close (since 1.40)
settings, doors in general at homing floor 1.00 NF - open and close opened, closed, open and close
settings, doors in general door nudging 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors in general door nudging after 1.00 NF 1s 30 s 1 s ... 300 s
settings, doors in general landing superv. ctrl. active 1.00 S 0,1 s 1s 0 s (1.18) ... 20 s
settings, doors in general reopen time 1.00 S 1s 6s 1s ...10s/to limit sw.
settings, doors in general door close butt. active 1.00 S 1s 4s after ... 5s/limit sw.
Settings, Doors in General door reverse to call 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general pre-opening doors 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors in general firefight ctrl. int. button operat. 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general door control on inspection 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general door monitor 1.22 S 10ms - -
settings, doors in general door monitor acc. to 1.31 S - ´specification EN´ ´specification EN´, ´specificat. sweden´
settings, doors in general photocell monitor 1.00 S 1 min 2 min ínactive´ ...30 min
settings, doors in general photocell activ at 1.35 S - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, doors in general presscont. activ at 1.40 S - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, doors in general at fire evacu. floor 1.00 NF - opened opened, open and close
settings, doors in general door push open/close selective 1.03 S - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general opening at start of priority call 1.23 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... further travel delay car calls 1.00 NF 1s 4s 1 s ...20 s
settings, doors side ... further travel delay land. calls 1.00 NF 1s 4s 1 s ...20 s
settings, doors side ... furth. trav. delay restart by photoc. 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... door to park closed 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors side ... door to park closed after 1.00 NF 1s 15 s 1 s ...45 s
settings, doors side ... door close timed out [2] 1.00 S 1s 60 s inactive ... 60 s
settings, doors side ... door open timed out [2] 1.00 S 1s 60 s 25 s ... 60 s
settings, doors side ... door reverse delay 1.00 NF 10 ms 500 ms 50 ms ... 1000 ms
settings, doors side ... door motor off at rest [3] 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... Reopen Time at limit switch open [2] 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... door motor off at limit switch [2] 1.26 NF - yes yes, no
MPK 40

settings, doors side ... door to park closed after [3] 1.00 S 1s 10 s 1 s ...60 s
settings, indicate / gong display mode 1.00 NF - binary selfdef. code, binary, 1 to N, add up, graycode, inv. graycode, 1 2 3 4
..., ...
settings, indicate / gong self defined indic. 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: self defined indicator)
settings, indicate / gong further direction arrow in the car 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong indicators off after ... min 1.00 NF 1 min inactive inactive ...10 min
settings, indicate / gong gong period ...s 1.00 NF 1s 5s 1 s ... 10 s
settings, indicate / gong gong on car calls 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong gong delayed after ... s 1.35 NF 0,1s 2s 0,1 s ... 5,0 s
settings, indicate / gong hall lantern flashing 1.00 S - no in travel, at levelling, no
settings, indicate / gong hall lantern at rest off 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong direction arrows flashing 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong car calls flashing 1.00 S - no undelayed, in travel, at levelling, no
settings, indicate / gong floor indicators permanently on 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong landing calls flashing 1.00 S - no at levelling, yes,no
settings, control functions control type 1.00 NF - 1 button collective down collective, 1 button collective, auto push button
settings, control functions main floor 1.00 NF 1 1 1 ... n
settings, control functions bottom floor return (hydraulic lift) 1.00 NF - on off,on
settings, control functions bott. fl. ret. timer (hydr. lift) 1.00 NF 1 min 15 min 1 min ... 15 min
settings, control functions cold weather start. (hydr. lift) 1.00 S 1 min 30 min 1 min ...60 min
settings, control functions emergency stop 1.00 NF - switch switch, button, push button swedish, switch specif. BS (1.44)
settings, control functions car light time delay 1.00 NF 1s inaktive inaktive ... 300 s
settings, control functions start of fan 1.00 S - with button with button in car, with car movement, w.button or car move (1.35)
settings, control functions fan delay 1.00 S 1s 30 s 1 s ...300 s
settings, control functions overload monitoring wh. standing 1.35 S - - -
settings, special-travels homing floor 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, 1 ... n
settings, special-travels checkfloor 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, 1 ... n
settings, special-travels fire evacuation floor [6] 1.00 NF - 1 1 ... n
settings, special-travels fire evacuation service at 1.00 NF - low signal (1.33) high signal, low signal
settings, special-travels fire fighting floor 1.00 NF - 1 1 ... n
settings, special-travels fire fight travel specification 1.00 NF - TRA TRA, EN, Sweden
settings, special-travels fire fight.travel at 1.26 NF - signal low (1.33) signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels write to event log 1.26 NF - no yes, no
settings, call operation empty cab. land ctrl. 1.00 NF - next stop next stop, at next car call, at last car call, inactive
settings, call operation empty cab. car prio. 1.00 NF - next stop next stop, at next car call, at last car call, inactive
settings, call operation car prio. call via 1.00 NF - key switch key switch, time limit, call limit, call/time limit, call limit multiple
settings, call operation car prio time 1.00 NF 1s 30 s 1s ...300 s
settings, call operation max car prio. calls 1.00 NF 1 1 1 ...(no. of stops -1)
settings, call operation car call cancel 1.00 NF 100ms inactive inactive...2000 ms
MPK 40

settings, call operation call signal buffer 1.00 NF 10 ms 40 ms 10 ms ...120 ms
settings, call operation Landing ctrl. off at 1.40 NF - signal low (1.40) signal high, signal low
settings, parking active [5] 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, parking parking floor int. 1.00 S 1 1 1 ... n
settings, parking parking floor ext. 1.00 S - inactive inactive, from times
settings, parking time interval 1.00 - - - (see functionlist: parking floor extern)
settings, parking parking time 1.00 NF 1s 15 s 0 s (1.23) ...300 s
settings, safety circuit supervise 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, safety circuit fault at 1.00 NF - low signal low signal, high signal
settings, safety circuit handling of faults 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret & block next floor & block [1], bot. fl. ret & block*, interrupt & block, preopen &
relev. off
settings, simple shaft encoder pulse buffer delay ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms ...80 ms
settings, simple shaft encoder pulse reaction time ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 50 ms 10 ms ...150 ms
settings, simple shaft encoder correction travel to 1.00 NF - bottom bottom,top
settings, simple shaft encoder short floor distance 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, simple shaft encoder impulse up switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, simple shaft encoder impulse down switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, hydraulic lift direct start 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, hydraulic lift YD change over timer 1.00 NF 0.1 s 2s 0.1 s ...10 s
settings, hydraulic lift motor delayed off upward after ... ms 1.45 NF 10 ms 400 ms 0 ms ...1500 ms
settings, hydraulic lift motor delayed off downw. after ... ms 1.45 NF 10 ms 0 ms 0 ms ...1500 ms
settings, hydraulic lift inspection speed 1.00 NF - v0 v0, v1, v2
settings, hydraulic lift delay after ...s 1.00 NF 1s 2s 1 s ... 5 s
settings, hydraulic lift thermistor 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret. & block, interrupt & block, stop at next
floor, interrupt
settings, hydraulic lift PTC output (motor) 1.00 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, AC unregulated direction delayed on after ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 100 ms 0 ms ...250 ms
settings, AC unregulated inspection speed, fast 1.00 NF - no yes,no
settings, AC unregulated thermistor 1.08 NF - bot. fl. ret & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret & block [1], interrupt & block, stop at next
floor, interrupt
settings, AC unregulated ptc output (motor) 1.08 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, AC unregulated motor ventilation 1.00 NF 1s inactive inactive ... 600 s
settings, travel monitor contactor monitor active 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, travel monitor start time monitor ...s 1.00 NF 1s 12 s inactive ...30 s
settings, travel monitor journey time monitor ... s 1.00 NF 1s 15 s inactive ...45 s
settings, travel monitor braking time monitor 1.00 NF 1s 20 s inactive ...30 s
settings, travel monitor handling of faults 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, interrupt, no reaction
settings, travel monitor brake monitoring 1.45 NF 100ms 1500 ms Inactive, 100ms, 6000ms (2.06)
settings, travel monitor fault brake monitoring 1.00 NF - interrupt & block interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, travel monitor Prim. Safe. Circ. Fault 1.34 NF - interrupt interrupt, interrupt & block
MPK 40

settings, travel monitor final limit switch 1.00 NF - specification EN specification EN, specefication TRA
settings, travel monitor Car module-monitor fault 1.43 S - Interrupt Interrupt, Interrupt & Block
settings, travel monitor Main Curr. Delay Off 1.40 NF - 3s Inactive - 10 s
settings, relevelling active 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, relevelling type 1.00 S - at floor level at floor level, with recall switch, recall switch to floor
settings, relevelling time limits 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, relevelling max time upwards 1.00 NF 1s 20 s 1 s ... 20 s
settings, relevelling max time downwards 1.00 NF 1s 20 s 1 s ... 20 s
settings, relevelling attempt limit 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, relevelling max. relevelling up 1.00 NF 1x 20 x 5 ... 20 x
settings, relevelling max relevelling down 1.00 NF 1x 20 x 5 ... 20 x
settings, relevelling attempt limit -fl. 1 (hydr. lift) 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, relevelling no. exceeded 1.00 S - bot. fl. ret. & block interrupt & block, bot. fl. ret. & block [1], no new relevelling
settings, relevelling handling of faults 1.00 S - bot. fl. ret. & block bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, relevelling relevel. on overload 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, Call Blocking block 1.00 S - inactive inactive, from times
settings, Call Blocking time interval 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: door blocking)
settings, remote monitoring remote monitor ID 2.00 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Tel.No Modem PC 2.00 S - - ( see functionlist: remote control )
settings, remote monitoring modem configuration 2.00 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Modem basic Config. 2.00 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Pass. Inc.Call after ... Bellsignals 1.29 S - 1 1 ... 8
Settings, Remote Monitoring Testcall 2.03 S - - -
settings, autom. function test interval 1.22 S - inactive inactive, 1 week, 2 weeks, 4 weeks
settings, autom. function test next date 1.22 S - 1 jan 2000 00:00 -
settings, autom. function test completion 1.22 S - inactive (test alarm button, leveling offset test, test door open butt.)
settings, autom. function test activate immediately 1.22 S - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Presetting Door Blocking 1.40 S - no yes,no
Testing/Maintenance, Presetting save events 1.40 S - yes yes,no
Testing/Maintenance, Presetting test travel speed 1.43 S - vInsp vInsp., vTestCtrl., v1, v2
Testing/Maintenance, Presetting Alarm-Filter 1.43 S - yes yes, no
Testing/Maintenance, Completion door control 1.40 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion start time monitor 1.40 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion journey time monitor 1.40 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion braking time monitor 1.40 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion reset travmonit. err 1.40 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion final limit switch 1.40 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion traction 1.40 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion weight balance 1.43 - - -
MPK 40

Testing/Maintenance, Completion car safety gear 1.43 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion counterw.safety gear 1.43 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion test buffers 1.41 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion over-speed 1.43 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion set call 1.40 - - -
MPK 400

information operation status 1.00 - - - -
information, operation status display 2.25 - - - -
information, operation status History 2.25 - - - -
information, event log display events 1.00 - - - -
information, event log clear events 1.00 - - - -
information, event log print events 1.00 - - - -
information, event log current event print 1.00 S - no yes, no
information, event log display system events 1.00 - - - -
information, event log clear system events 1.00 - - - -
information parameter print 1.00 - - - -
information, test module BST-IOs 1.00 - - - -
information, test module net-IOs 1.00 - - - -
information BST-terminals-setup 1.00 - - - -
information net-terminal-setup 1.00 - - - -
information module list 1.00 - - - -
information parking floor plan 1.23 - - - -
information, MPK-Diagnostics RAM free 2.33 - - - -
information, MPK-Diagnostics Zero Power RAM free 2.33 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics stop position 1.12 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics actual position 2.33 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics resolution 1.12 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics encoder / input lead 1.12 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics speed [m/s] 1.12 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics accelaration [m/s^2] 1.12 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics decelaration [m/s^2] 1.12 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics measured brake.dist 1.12 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics floor/zone/dest.zone 2.22 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics zone list 1.12 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics Valid Learn. Travel 1.25 - - - -
information, APS-Diagnostics Act. Learning Travel 1.25 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics stop position 1.12 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics resolution 1.36 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics encoder / input lead (only SEM DSK) 2.32 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics speed [m/s] (only MDSK) 2.03 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics speed [m/s] (only SEM DSK) 2.32 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics accelaration [m/s^2] (only SEM DSK) 2.32 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics decelaration [m/s^2] (only SEM DSK) 2.32 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics measured brake.dist (only SEM DSK) 2.32 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics floor/zone/dest.zone (only SEM DSK) 2.32 - - - -
Prgv.: programversion, wn.: effective after, Int.: interval, S: at once, NF: next travel, R: reset; EM: extension module; [..]: notes look functionslist chap.1.1; * default set-up see “technical description” II – B / 1
MPK 400

information, DSK-Diagnostics zone list (only SEM DSK) 2.32 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics Valid Learn. Travel 1.36 - - - -
information, DSK-Diagnostics Act. Learning Travel 1.36 - - - -
information, DCP-Diagnostics DCP control signals 1.12 - - - -
information, DCP-Diagnostics DCP connection quality 2.17 - - - -
information, DCP-Diagnostics Drive Protocol Info 2.21 - - - -
information group members 1.00 - - - -
information, network diagnosis trouble 1.00 - - - -
information, network diagnosis comunication flow 1.00 - - - -
information, transponder/reader test key 1.00 - - - -
information, transponder/reader active command 1.00 - - - -
information, remote monitoring Installation-ID 2.00 - - - -
information, remote monitoring Remote Monitoring-ID 2.09 - - - -
information, remote monitoring state of connection 2.00 - - - -
Information, Load weighing system Actual value 1.33 - - - -
Information, Load weighing system Display measur.point 1.33 - - - -
Information, Load weighing system Resolution 1.33 - - - -
Information, Load weighing system Persons per Day 1.33 - - - -
Information, Load weighing system Persons per Hour 1.33 - - - -
information power safe mode 2.25 - - - -
information, trip counter display 1.00 - - - -
information, trip counter clear 1.00 - - - -
information, trip counter intervall 1.00 - - 0 0...999.999.999
information, trip counter set 2.18 - - - -
information, running time counter display 1.00 - - - -
information, running time counter clear 1.00 - - - -
information, running time counter set 2.18 - - - -
information, running time counter interval 1.00 - - 0h 0 h....60.000 h
information, usage category according VDI 4707 2.23 - - - -
information Further Travel Delay adaptive 2.26 - - - -
information, lift / control no. set controller no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. clear controller no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. set lift no. 1.00 - - - -
information, lift / control no. clear lift no. 1.00 - - - -
information date/time display 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. lift ... 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. operating system 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. menu program 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. MAPS-modul 1.00 - - - -
MPK 400

information, version no. MDSK-modul (only SEM DSK) 2.32 - - - -
information, version no. DSC programm (only MDSK) 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. modulesoftware 1.00 - - - -
information, version no. Transponder/Reader 1.00 - - - -
see/give calls ok for call at lowest floor 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls ok for call at top floor 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls floor 1 - ... 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program car calls 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program landing calls up 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program landing calls down 1.00 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program Landing- & Car-Mode 2.15 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program Destination Dispatch 2.22 S - - -
see/give calls, simulated call program automatic off after ... mins 2.09 S 1 min inactive inactive, 1 min ... 60 min
code no. user log on 1.00 - - - -
code no. user log off 1.00 - - - -
code no. user identity 1.00 - - - -
code no. edit 1.00 - - - -
code no. automatic user log off 1.00 S - yes yes, no
basic settings, lift no. of stops 1.00 R 1 2 2 - 56 stops
basic settings, lift lowest floor 1.00 R 1 1 1- (no. of stops-1)
basic settings, lift no. of car doors 1.00 R 1 1 1 ... 3 (1.28)
basic settings, lift table of entrances 1.00 R - autom. with limit (autom. w./without limit sw., manual gates (1.10), swing doors witho.
sw./syncronised doors limit sw, swing doors witho. car door, no door),(syncronised doors,
selective doors, sequential door op.)
basic settings, lift type of selector 1.00 R - horizontal selector horizontal selector, vertical selector, digital selector, APS/autom. learn.
trav., APS/man. learn. operat., simple shaft copier
basic settings, lift pawl device 1.17 R - inactive inactive, active, with table (1.44)
basic settings, lift pawl device table 1.44 R - inactive inactive, active
basic settings, lift drive type 1.00 R - hydraulic hydraulic, variable freq. AC, AC-unregulated, hydr. variable freq.
basic settings, lift serial motor link 1.00 R - inactive inactive, DCP3, DCP4
basic settings, lift group- lift-no. 1.00 R 1 1 1...8
basic settings, lift control type 1.00 R - 1 button collective full collective, down collective, 1 button collective, auto push button,
FIFO-control, destination dispatch (2.12), goods lift (2.19)
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, active for em. Power 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Adjustment Travel 2.22 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, alarm 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
Basic Settings, MPK-control BST-input, allow emerg. Trav car 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, APS-learn. Op. Act. 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, APS-learn. Op. Level 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, attendant op. Bypass 2.28 R - - E2 – E8, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Attendant Operator 2.06 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, bolt limit sw. Activ 1.17 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, bolt limit sw. Deact 1.17 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, brake monitoring 1 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, brake wear 1.38 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Bus Stop 2.21 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, call block 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Car adjusted 1.41 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, car call block 1.30 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, car calls blocking 1.30 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, car empty/user 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, close limit sw. Do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, cold weather start 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, completion testing 1.24 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, contact rib.Fl. [T] 1.24 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, contact ribb. Car 1 1.24 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, contact ribb. Car 2 1.24 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, correction bottom 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, correction bottom BST 1.41 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, correction top 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, correction top BST 1.41 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, crosscall cancel dwn 1.23 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, crosscall cancel up 1.23 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, detect. Edge open do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, detect. Edge stop do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, do. close push do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, do. open push do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, door blocking 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, door hold push do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, door monitor 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, door monitor [fl.] 1.37 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, down peak traffic 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, emer. Power travel 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, emerg. Power contr. 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, emerg. Travel cancel 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Emergency Electrical Operation 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Emergency Electrical Operation down 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Emergency Electrical Operation up 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Emergency Light Accu 2.16 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fan push button 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fire detector 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fire evacuation 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fire evacuation service 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, fire fighting door close 1.28 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, FireEva.Serv. CH Off 1.28 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, FireEva.Serv. CH On 1.28 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, firef.ctrl.ext auto. [T] 1.32 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, firefight. Ctrl. Ext. 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, firefight. Ctrl. Int. 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Full Load 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit bed transp. [T] 1.31 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit ext.lndcall [T] 1.31 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit land. Calls [T] 1.31 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit portpriocal [T] 2.03 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit prio. Calls [T] 1.31 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, grpsplit specpriocal [T] 2.03 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, impulse down 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, impulse up 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, inspection 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Inspection Fast 1.07 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, inspection travel down 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, inspection travel up 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, landing call block 1.45 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, landing calls blocking 1.45 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, landing conrol off 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, landing superv. Ctrl. Do.[9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, level down 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, level up 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, leveltest 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, light voltage 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, load weight level 1 1.24 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Lock Fast Start 2.19 R - - E2 – E8, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, low press. Pawl dev. 1.17 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Main Current 1.06 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, maintenance 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, minimum load 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, open limit sw. Do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, overload 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, parking external 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, pawl device deactive 1.32 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, person transport 2.22 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, photocell do. [9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, power safe lev 2 deac. 2.15 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, power safe mode 1.45 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, prelimit switch- top 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, prelimit switch-bot 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, press. Contact do.[9] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, priority travel car 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, push button dir.down 2.06 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, push button dir.up 2.06 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, readiness service 2.09 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, readiness service 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, regul. Remote set-up 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, release survey stop 1.45 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, releveling sw. Down 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, releveling sw. Up 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Remote liftXpress 1 2.20 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Remote liftXpress 2 2.20 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, remote switch group 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, reverse car call cancel 1.27 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, safe.circ. pawl dev. 1.17 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Safety Module 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, safety photocell 1 2.09 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, safety photocell 2 2.09 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, sensor car FRONT 2.12 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, sensor car MIDDLE 2.12 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, sensor car REAR 2.12 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, slowdown monitoring 1.22 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Speed v1 1.39 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, speed v1 down off 1.41 R - - E2 – E8, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, speed v1 up off 1.41 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, speed-monitoring 1.06 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, StartDir.EM.Pow.Trav [T] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, survey stop deactive 1.36 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, temperature monitor 1.43 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, touchdown activ 1.17 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, travel lock input 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, universal input 1 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, up peak traffic 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, user control deact. 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, user group 1 2.27 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, vehicle transport 2.12 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, vEmergency Elec. Operation 1.39 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, vInspection 1.39 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, VIP travel cancel 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, VIP travel ena. Int. [T] 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, Zone Safety Module 1.00 R - -* E2 – E8, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, zone switch S71 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-input, zone switch S72 1.00 R - - E2 – E8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Acc. Cl. Lim sw do. [9] 2.09 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Acc. Op. Lim sw do. [9] 2.09 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, accep. Do. hold do. [9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Accep. Do. rev. Do. [9] 2.09 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Accep.ContactRib.Fl. [T] 1.24 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, accept, user group 1 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Accept. Minimum Load 2.23 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Accept. TargetFl. 2.15 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Acceptance Full Load 2.23 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Acceptance new Event 2.23 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Acceptance Overload 2.23 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, alarm misusage 1.19 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Announc. Do. cl. Door [9] 1.44 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Announc. Do. closing 2.26 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Announc. Do. op. Door [9] 1.44 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Announc. Do. opening 2.26 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, announc. Travel down 2.26 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, announc. Travel up 2.26 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, APS-learn. Op. Ack. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, APS-learn. Trav. Valid 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, APS-zone output 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, arrival deviation 2.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, arrival indic. Dw 2.20 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, arrival indic. Up 2.20 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, arrival indicator 1.34 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at bottom floor 1.27 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at em. Power floor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at fire evacuation floor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-Output, at homing floor 2.06 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at parking floor 1.27 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, at readin. Serv. Fl. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, attendant operator 2.06 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bed transport 1.24 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bed transport active 1.24 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, block indc. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bolt activation 1.17 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bolt deactivation 1.17 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bottom floor return 1.27 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, bridge S10 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Bus Stop 2.21 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Call Acceptance 2.12 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Car Door Lock 2.14 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car gong 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car gong down 1.07 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car gong up 1.07 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car here 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car movement 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car movement down 1.07 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, car movement up 1.07 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, coll. Fault registr. 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Disabl. Panel enable 2.29 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Disabled fl. Reached 2.29 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Disabled prio. Trav. 2.29 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display segment 1 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, display ServIntv. 1 1.14 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, do. cntr. Close do. [9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, do. cntr. Open do. [9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault closing 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault message 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, door fault opening 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, doors close command 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, down-arrow 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, DWN-Ar./Hall Lantern 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, em. Trav. Fl. Reached 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Em.Pow.Sequence done [T] 2.07 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Em.Power Trav. Fail. [T] 2.07 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, emer. Pow. Sequence 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, emer. Power travel 1.27 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, emergency travel 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Extern. Extern. Gong Down 2.15 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Extern. Gong Up 2.15 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, external gong 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fan output 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Fast Start 2.19 R - - A1-A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Fault auto. Func.test 1.36 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fault pawl device 1.17 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-Output, Field enable 1.36 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Fire Detector 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fire evacu. Travel 1.27 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, fire fighting op. 1.32 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, firefight fl. Reach. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, firefight. Ctrl. Ext 2.35 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, firefight. Ctrl. Int 2.35 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, hall lantern down 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, hall lantern down [fl.] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, hall lantern up 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, hall lantern up [fl.] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Insp./Emer.Elec.Oper 1.45 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, in-use-light 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, journey time monitor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Land. Prio. Travel 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Land.Prio.Fl.Reached 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, landing call above 2.06 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, landing call below 2.06 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, landing control off 2.06 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, level output 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, lift blocked 2.24 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, loading possible 1.17 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Maintenance 1.22 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, motor thermistor 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, motor ventilation 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, no selector position 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, nudging sig.do. [9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, nudging. Do.[9] 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out Call-Request 1.14 R - - A1- A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out car empty 2.14 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out emerg. Power serv. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out fire evacuation service 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out of service 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, out readiness service 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Outp. Remote Command 1.07 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Output Ref.Point 1.00 R - - EM A17 9 – 16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Output Temp. Monitor 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall bed transp. 1.24 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Overall Disab. Prio. 2.29 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall hold time 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall land. Priority 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall porter priority 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall spec. Priority 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, overall visit. Travel 1.34 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, parking travel 1.27 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, passing signal 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Port.Prio.Fl.Reached [T] 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, porter priority 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, power safe level 1 2.15 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, power safe level 2 2.15 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Prim. Safe. Circ. Fault 1.06 R - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, readiness serv. Trav. 1.27 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, relev./decellerate 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, relevelling 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, reset-sequ. Compl. 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, retir. Cam sel.do. [9] 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, retiring cam 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, safety photocell test 1.46 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, short circ. A1-A8 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, short circ. Motor signals 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, short circ. Term.200 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, short circ. Term.201 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, signal attendant op. 2.06 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, signal BACKWARD 2.12 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, signal DRIVE 2.12 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, signal FORWARD 2.12 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, signal GREEN 2.12 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, signal RED 2.12 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, signal STOP 2.12 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Spec.Prio.Fl.Reached [T] 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, special priority 2.03 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, speech trigger 1.26 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Speed v0 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Speed v3 1.00 R - - EM A17 9 – 16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, test alarm button 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, test butt. Door open 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel lock output 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, travel requirement 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, Trigger Op. Lim. Sw. 2.19 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, universal output 1 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, UP-Ar./Hall Lantern 1.43 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, up-arrow 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, valve control 1.00 R - -* A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, vEmergency Electric Operation 1.00 R - - EM A17 9 – 16
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, v-fast 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, VIP floor reached 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, VIP travel 1.00 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, visitor travel 1.34 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-output, vRescue reached 1.19 R - - A1 – A8, FBR, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, bed transport 1.24 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, car calls 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, disabled call 2.29 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, down call 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, emergency travel 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, ext. land. calls down 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, ext. land. calls up 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, Landing Priority 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, porter priority 2.03 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, special priority 2.03 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, up call 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, VIP travel 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-calls, Visitor Call 1.34 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, accep.ContactRib.Fl. [T] 1.24 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, arrival indic. dw 2.20 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, arrival indic. up 2.20 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, arrival indicator 1.34 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, bed transport 1.24 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, bed transport active 1.24 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, block indc. 1.00 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, call block 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, car call 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, car call block 1.30 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, car here 1.00 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, contact rib.Fl. [T] 1.24 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, crosscall cancel dwn 1.23 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, crosscall cancel up 1.23 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, display segment 1.00 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, display serv.interv. 1.14 R - - A1 - A8, EM
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, down call 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, emergency travel 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, ext. land. calls down 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, ext. land. calls up 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, extern. gong 1.00 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, Extern. Gong Down 2.15 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, Extern. Gong Up 2.15 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, fire detector 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, fire evacuation service 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, hall lantern down [fl.] 1.00 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, hall lantern up [fl.] 1.00 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, landing call block 1.45 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, Landing Priority 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, parking external 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, porter priority 2.03 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, readine. serv. 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, signal GREEN 2.12 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, signal RED 2.12 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, special priority 2.03 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, universal inputs 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, universal outputs 1.00 R - - A1 - A8, EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, up call 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, VIP travel 1.00 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-functionset, visitor call 1.34 R - - EM
basic settings, MPK-control BST-term.-release 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input user, group 3 2.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, active for em. power 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, adjustment travel 2.20 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, alarm 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, allow emerg. trav car 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, APS-learn. op. active 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, APS-learn. op. level 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Attendant Op. Bypass 2.28 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Attendant Operator 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, bolt limit sw. activ 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, bolt limit sw. deact 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, brake monitoring 1 1.00 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-input, brake wear 1.38 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Bus Stop 2.21 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, call block 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, car adjusted 1.41 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, car call block 1.30 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, car calls blocking 1.30 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, car empty 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, close limit sw. do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, cold weather start 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, completion testing 1.22 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, contact rib.Fl. [T] 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, contact ribb. car 1 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, contact ribb. car 2 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, correction bottom 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, correction top 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, crosscall cancel dwn 1.23 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, crosscall cancel up 1.23 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, detect. edge open do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, detect. edge stop do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, do. close push do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, do. hold push do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, do. open push do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, door blocking 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, door monitor 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, door monitor [fl.] 1.37 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, down peak traffic 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emer. power travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emerg. power contr. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emergency electrical operation 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emergency electrical operation down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, emergency electrical operation up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Emergency Light Accu 1.32 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fan push button 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fire detector 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fire evacu. service 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, fire evacuation 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, FireEva.Serv. CH Off 1.28 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, FireEva.Serv. CH On 1.28 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, firef.ctrl.ext auto. [T] 1.32 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-input, firefight close door 1.28 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, firefight. ctrl. ext. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, firefight. ctrl. int. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Full Load 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, grpsplit bed transp. [T] 1.31 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, grpsplit ext.Indcall [T] 1.31 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, grpsplit land. calls [T] 1.31 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, grpsplit prio. calls [T] 1.31 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Grpsplit protpriocall [T] 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Grpsplit specpriocall [T] 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, impulse down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, impulse up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, inspect. travel down 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, inspection 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, inspection fast 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, inspection travel up 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, landing call block 1.45 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, landing calls blocking 1.45 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, landing control off 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, landing superv. ctrl. do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, level down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, level test 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, level up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, light voltage 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, load weight level 1 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Lock Fast Start 2.19 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, low press. pawl dev. 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, main current 1.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, maintenance 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, minimum load 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, open limit sw. do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, overload 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, parking external 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, pawl device deactive 1.32 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, person transport 2.22 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-input, photocell do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, power safe lev 2 deact. 2.15 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, power safe mode 1.45 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, prelimit switch- bot 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, prelimit switch-top 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, press contact do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, priority travel car 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, push button dir.down 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, push button dir.up 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, readin. serv. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, readine. trav. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, readiness service 2.09 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, regul. remote set-up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, release survey stop 1.45 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, releveling sw. down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, releveling sw. up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Remote liftXpress 1 2.20 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Remote liftXpress 2 2.20 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, remote switch group 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, reverse car call cancel 1.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, safe.circ. pawl dev. 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, safety module 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, safety photocell 1 2.09 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, safety photocell 2 2.09 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, sensor car BACK 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, sensor car FRONT 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, sensor car MIDDLE 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, slowdown monitoring 1.22 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, speed v1 down off 1.41 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, speed v1 up off 1.41 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-input, speed-monitoring 1.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, StartDir.EM.Pow.Trav [T] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, survey stop deactive 1.36 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, temperature monitor 1.43 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, touchdown activ 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, travel lock input 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, universal input 1 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, up peak traffic 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, user control deact. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, user group 1 2.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, vehicle transport 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, VIP travel cancel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, VIP travel cancel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, VIP travel ena. int. [T] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, zone safety module 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, zone switch S71 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-input, zone switch S72 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, acc. Cl. lim sw do. [9] 2.09 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, acc. Op. lim sw do. [9] 2.09 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Accep. do. rev. do. [9] 2.09 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Accep.ContactRib.Fl. [T] 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, accept user group 1 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, accept. do. hold do. [9] 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Accept. Minimum Load 2.23 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Accept. TargetFl. 2.15 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Acceptance Full Load 2.23 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Acceptance new Event 2.23 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Acceptance Overload 2.23 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, alarm misusage 1.19 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Announc. Do. Cl. Door [9] 1.44 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Announc. Do. Closing 2.26 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Announc. Do. Op. door [9] 1.44 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Announc. Do. Opening 2.26 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, announc. travel down 2.26 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, announc. travel up 2.26 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, APS-learn. op. ack. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, APS-learn. trav. valid 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, arrival deviation 1.46 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, arrival indic. dw 2.20 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, arrival indic. up 2.20 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, arrival indicator 1.34 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at bottom floor 1.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at em. power floor 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at fire evacu. floor 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at homing floor 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at parking floor 1.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, at readin. serv. fl. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, attendant operator. 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, bed transport 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, bed transport active 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, block indc. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, bolt activation 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, bolt deactivation 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, bottom floor return 1.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Bus Stop 2.21 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Call Acceptance 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Car Door Lock 2.14 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car gong 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car gong down 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car gong up 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car here 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car movement 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car movement down 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, car movement up 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, coll. fault registr. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Disabled fl. reached 2.29 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Disabled fl. reached 2.29 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Disabled prio. Trav. 2.29 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 1 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display segment 10 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, display ServIntv. 1 1.14 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, do. contr. close do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, do. contr. open do. [9] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault closing 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault message 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, door fault opening 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, doors close command 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, down-arrow 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, DWN-Ar./Hall Lantern [T] 1.43 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, em. trav. fl. reached 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, EM.Pow.Sequence done [T] 2.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, EM.Power Trav. Fail. [T] 2.07 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-output, emer. pow. sequence 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, emer. power travel 1.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, emergency travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, extern. gong 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Extern. Gong Down 2.15 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Extern. Gong Up 2.15 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fan output 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Fault auto. Func.test 1.36 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fault pawl device 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fire detector 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fire evacu. travel 1.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fire fight fl. reach. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, fire fighting op. 1.32 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, firefight. ctrl. ext 2.35 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, firefight. ctrl. int 2.35 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall lantern down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall lantern down [fl.] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall lantern up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, hall lantern up [fl.] 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Insp./Emer.Elec.Oper 1.45 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, in-use-light 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, journey time monitor 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Land. Prio. Travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Land.Prio.Fl.Reached 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, landing call above 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, landing call below 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, landing control off 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, level output 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, lift blocked 2.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, loading possible 1.17 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Maintenance 1.22 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, motor ventilation 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, no selector position 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, nudging do. 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, nudging sig. door 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out Call-Request 1.14 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out car empty 2.14 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out emerg. power serv. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out fire evac. serv. 1.00 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out of service 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, out readin. service 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Outp. Remote Command 1.07 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Output Temp. Monitor 1.43 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall bed transp. 1.24 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Overall Disab. Prio. 2.29 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall hold time 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall land. priority 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall porter prio. 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall spec. prio. 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, overall visit. travel 1.34 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, parking travel 1.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, passing signal 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Port.Prio.Fl.Reached [T] 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, porter priority 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, power safe level 1 2.15 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, power safe level 2 2.15 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Prim. Safe. Circ. Fault 1.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, PTC output (motor) 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, readiness serv. trav. 1.27 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, reset-sequ. compl. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, retir. cam sel.do. [9] 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Retiring Cam 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, safety photocell test 1.46 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, short circ. A1-A8 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, short circ. motor signals 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, short circ. term.200 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, short circ. term.201 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Shutdown Light Off 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, signal attendant op. 2.06 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, signal BACKWARD 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, signal DRIVE 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, signal FORWARD 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, signal GREEN 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, signal RED 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, signal STOP 2.12 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Spec.Prio.Fl.Reached [T] 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, special priority 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, speech trigger 1.26 R - - -
MPK 400

basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Speed v0 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, test alarm button 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, test door open butt. 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, travel lock output 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, travel requirement 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, Trigger Op. Lim. Sw. 2.19 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, universal output 1 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, UP-Ar./Hall Lantern 1.43 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, up-arrow 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, VIP floor reached 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, VIP travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, visitor travel 1.34 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, vRescue reached 1.19 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-output, zone output 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, bed transport 1.24 R - - -

basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, car call 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, disabled call 2.29 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, down call 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, emergency travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, ext. Land. Calls down 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, ext. Land. Calls up 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, Landing Priority 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, porter priority 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, special priority 2.03 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, up call 1.00 R - -* -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, VIP travel 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-calls, Visitor Call 1.34 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control net-term.-release 1.00 R - - -
basic settings, MPK-control input bounce timer 1.00 R - 25 ms 25ms, 75ms, 125ms, 175ms, 225 ms
MPK 400
basic settings, MPK-control set time 1.00 S - hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss

basic settings, MPK-control daylight savingtime 1.00 R - yes yes, no
basic settings, MPK-control data-interface a 1.00 R - MPKEasy not used, printer/terminal, terminal, MPKEasy, VisualLift w. modem
(2.00), VisualLift w/o modem (2.00), VisualLift w. GPRS (2.09)
basic settings, MPK-control transmission rate a 1.00 R - 19200/8/N/1 38400/8/N/1, 19200/8/N/1, 9600/8/N/1, 4800/8/N/1, 2400/8/N/1
basic settings, MPK-control language 1.00 R - deutsch deutsch, english, swenska, nederlands, polski, espanol
basic settings, MPK-control switch on delay 1.00 R 1s 2s ínactive´ ... 15 s
basic settings, MPK-control construction-operation 1.00 R - no yes, no
basic settings, MPK-control Car Module present 1.00 R - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general door open trigger 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s ...2,0 s
settings, doors in general lock delayed on 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s...2,0 s
settings, doors in general lock bounce timer 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s ...2,0 s
settings, doors in general lock delayed off 1.00 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s .... 10,0 s
settings, doors in general lock fault monitor 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general lock fault monitor delay 1.00 S 1s 7s 5 s ...60 s
settings, doors in general at the parking floor 1.00 NF - open and close opened, closed, open and close
settings, doors in general at main park. floor 1.03 NF - open and close opened, closed, open and close, next up (1.23)
settings, doors in general next up mode delayed off 1.24 NF - inactive inactive, 1.. 60 min
settings, doors in general at homing floor 1.00 NF - open and close opened, closed, open and close
settings, doors in general at bottom floor 1.03 NF - closed opened, closed, open and close
settings, doors in general door nudging 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors in general door nudging after 1.00 NF 1s 30 s 1 s ... 300 s
settings, doors in general landing superv. ctrl. active 1.00 S 0,1 s 1s 0 s ... 20 s
settings, doors in general landing superv. ctrl. door reverse max 1.42 S 1 3 unlimit., 1... 10
settings, doors in general landing superv. ctrl. timeout 1.42 S 1 1min inactive, 1... 5 min
settings, doors in general landing superv. ctrl. at Rest active 2.13 S - no yes, no
settings, doors in general reopen time 1.00 S 1s 6s 1s ...10s/to limit sw.
settings, doors in general door close butt. active 1.00 S 1s 4s after ... 5s/limit sw.
Settings, Doors in General door reverse to call 1.00 NF - yes; 3 (1.22) yes, no; inactive, 1 - 5 (1.22)
settings, doors in general door reverse at main floor 1.22 NF - 3 Calls inactive, 1 - 5 Calls
settings, doors in general pre-opening doors 1.00 NF - no, when using APS / DSK yes, no, when using APS / DSK inkr. (SEM) with ´Lift4h2.33´ or higher:
inkr. (SEM) with ´Lift4h2.33´ ..cm ahead of lev., no
or higher: 10cm ahead of lev.
settings, doors in general firefight ctrl. int. button operat. 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general sequ. door oper. at firemans operat. 1.00 NF - NO yes, no
settings, doors in general door control on inspection 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general loading time 1.00 S 1s 60 s 10 s ...900 s (1.14)
settings, doors in general hold time pushed aga. 1.00 NF - restart time cancel time, restart time
settings, doors in general Door Hold Time restart by Photoc. 2.22 S - no yes, no
MPK 400
settings, doors in general door monitor 1.00 S 10ms ínactive´ ínactive´ ... 1000ms
settings, doors in general door monitor acc. to 1.01 S - ´specification EN´ ´specification EN´, ´specificat. sweden´, ´specificat. russia (1.37)´
settings, doors in general photocell monitor 1.00 S 1 min 2 min ínactive´ ...30 min
settings, doors in general photocell activ at 1.08 S - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, doors in general presscont. activ at 1.19 S - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, doors in general at readin. serv. fl. 1.00 NF - opened opened, open and close
settings, doors in general at fire evacu. floor 1.00 NF - opened opened, open and close
settings, doors in general door push open/close, hold 1.17 S - selective selective, syncronised
settings, doors in general door open button active at closing limt switch 2.19 S - yes yes, no
settings, doors in general opening at start of priority call 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors in general monitoring v<0,8m/s 1.06 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors in general swingd. bounce timer 2.01 S 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s ...2,0 s
settings, doors in general lock selective 2.03 S - no yes,no
settings, doors in general Door cl Butt. inact. at Mainfloor 2.14 S - no yes,no
settings, doors in general Hold Time with door op/cl but.simult 2.14 S - no yes,no
settings, doors in general Further Travel Delay adaptive 2.26 S - no yes,no
settings, doors in general Door op.but. affects last opened door 2.33 S - no yes,no
settings, doors side ... further travel delay car calls 1.00 NF 1s 4s 1 s ...20 s
settings, doors side ... further travel delay land. calls 1.00 NF 1s 4s 1 s ...20 s
settings, doors side ... Further Travel Delay Land. at Mainfl. 2.23 NF 1s 4s 1 s ...20 s
settings, doors side ... furth. trav. delay restart by photoc. 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... door to park closed 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, doors side ... door to park closed after 1.00 NF 1s 15 s 1 s ...45 s
settings, doors side ... door open timed out [2] 1.00 S 1s 60 s inactive, 1s ... 60 s
settings, doors side ... door close timed out [2] 1.00 S 1s 60 s inactive, 1s ... 60 s
settings, doors side ... door reverse delay 1.00 NF 10 ms 500 ms 50 ms ... 5000 ms (2.20)
settings, doors side ... door motor off at rest [3] 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... Reopen Time at limit switch open [2] 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, doors side ... door motor off at limit switch [2] 1.00 NF - yes yes, no, at Cl. Lim Sw. only (2.24)
settings, doors side ... door to park closed after [3] 1.00 S 1s 10 s 1 s ...60 s
settings, doors side ... Door Control during Start at Close Limit Switch [2] 2.24 NF - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong display modules 1.00 - - - (see functionlist: indicator modules)
settings, indicate / gong self defined indic. 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: self defined indicator)
settings, indicate / gong floor text 2.06 S - - 0-9/a-z/A-Z/Sonderzeichen
settings, indicate / gong floor text active 2.06 S - no no, at levelling, at standing
settings, indicate / gong special text 2.06 S - - 0-9/a-z/A-Z/Sonderzeichen
settings, indicate / gong special text at 2.06 S - inactive inactive, (collection of operation states)
settings, indicate / gong floor indicators scrolling 2.06 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong arrows scrolling 2.06 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong further direction arrow in the car 1.00 NF - no yes, no
MPK 400
settings, indicate / gong indicators off after ... mins 1.00 NF 1 min inactive inactive ...10 mins
settings, indicate / gong gong period ...s 1.00 NF 1s 5s 1 s ... 10 s
settings, indicate / gong gong on car calls 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong gong delayed after ... s 1.07 NF 0,1s 2s 0,1 s ... 15,0 s (2.07)
settings, indicate / gong Speech Trig. period ... s 1.26 NF 1s 1s 1 s ... 10 s
settings, indicate / gong speech trig. delayed after ... s 1.26 NF 0,1s 2s 0,1 s ... 15,0 s (2.07)
settings, indicate / gong speech trig. (signal) 1.45 NF - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, indicate / gong hall lantern flashing 1.00 S - no in travel, at levelling, no
settings, indicate / gong hall lantern at rest off 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong direction arrows flashing 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong arrival indic. flashing 2.20 S - no at levelling, no
settings, indicate / gong arrival indic. delayed off 2.20 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong car calls flashing 1.00 S - no undelayed, in travel, at levelling, no
settings, indicate / gong landing calls up flashing 1.00 S - no at levelling, yes, no
settings, indicate / gong landing calls down flashing 1.00 S - no at levelling, yes, no
settings, indicate / gong land. prior. calls flashing 1.00 S - no at levelling, yes, no
settings, indicate / gong floor indicators permanently on 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, indicate / gong Call Acceptance 2.12 S 1s 3s inactive, 1 s ... 15 s
settings, indicate / gong Display KBI 16x16 2.29 S - Fl. Indic. or Arrows Fl. Indic. or Arrows, Arrows only, Floor Indicator only, Fl.Indic. and
Arrows
settings, indicate / gong Display KBK 16x16 2.29 S - Fl. Indic. or Arrows Fl. Indic. or Arrows, Arrows only, Floor Indicator only, Fl.Indic. and
Arrows
settings, control functions main floor 1.00 NF 1 1 1 ... n
settings, control functions bottom floor return (hydraulic lift) 1.00 NF - on off,on
settings, control functions bott. fl. ret. timer (hydr. lift) 1.00 NF 1 min 15 min 1 min ... 15 min
settings, control functions bott. fl. ret. speed (hydr. lift) 2.12 NF - v2 or v5 (depending on v0, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5 (depending on selector type)
selector type)
settings, control functions cold weather start. (hydr. lift) 1.00 S 1 min 30 min 1 min ...60 min
settings, control functions emergency stop 1.00 NF - switch switch, push button, push button swedish, switch specif. BS (1.41)
settings, control functions signal attendant op. duration 2.06 NF 0.1 s 1s 0.1 s ...60.0 s
settings, control functions car light time delay 1.00 NF 1s inactive inactive ... 900 s (1.36)
settings, control functions start of fan 1.00 S - with button with button in car, with car movement, w.button or car move (1.09)
settings, control functions fan delay 1.00 S 1s 30 s 1 s ...300 s
settings, control functions overload monitoring wh. standing 1.09 S - no yes, no
settings, control functions overload at 2.23 S - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, control functions Travel Lock 1.28 S - Via Terminals Inactive, Via Terminals, Via DLON-Net, Via GLON-Net
settings, control functions Duration Travel Lock 1.28 NF - For Complete Travel For Complete Travel, During Start 1... 30s
settings, control functions Inspection off at Correct. Switch 1.42 NF - no yes, no
settings, control functions Output Lift blocked 2.37 S - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, control functions universal input 2.38 NF - - -
settings, special-travels homing floor 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, 1 ... n
MPK 400
settings, special-travels checkfloor 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, 1 ... n

settings, special-travels survey floor 1.36 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels survey floor time 1.45 NF - 4s "wait for terminal", 1s ... 900 s
settings, special-travels readiness service via 1.00 NF - freibelegb. Eingang with progr. input, at all floors
settings, special-travels readiness serv. floor [6] 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels readiness service at 1.00 NF - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels fire evacuation service via 1.00 NF - with progr. input with progr. input, at all floors, to BSA Leipzig , Specifica. Switzerland
(1.28), Specificat. EN81-73 (2.02)
settings, special-travels fire evacuation floor [6] 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels 2nd fire evacuation floor [6] 1.08 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels fire evacuation service at 1.00 NF - low signal (1.03) high signal, low signal
settings, special-travels FireEvacuSpecEN81-73 Do.op. LandCall 2.19 NF - no yes, no
settings, special-travels fire fighting floor 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels fire fight travel specification 1.00 NF - TRA TRA, EN, Sweden, BS, BSA Leipzig, Helvetia (1.06), Australia (1.28),
EN81-72 (1.32)
settings, special-travels fire fight.travel at 1.00 NF - signal low (1.03) signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels fire detect. serv. at (signal) 1.00 NF - signal low signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels emer. power floor ... 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: special travels)
settings, special-travels emerg. power travel via 1.00 NF - free progr. terminal free prog. terminal, ring concept (BUS), star concept (BUS)
settings, special-travels starcontr. em. power d. 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: ring contr. emerg. pow. drive)
settings, special-travels startattempts em. pow 1.00 NF - 1 1 ... 10
settings, special-travels lift during emerg. power 1.00 NF - out of order out of order, in order
settings, special-travels emerg. power at 1.00 NF - signal high signal high, signal low
settings, special-travels on emerg. pow. inmed. to bottom floor (hydraulic 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
lift)
settings, special-travels Journey Time Monitor on Emer. Pow. 2.26 NF - active active, inactive
settings, special-travels write to event log 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, special-travels Bus Stop Dwelltime 2.21 NF - 30 s inactive, 1s ... 600s
settings, call operation call cancellation direct depend. 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, call operation empty cab. land ctrl. 1.00 NF - at last car call next stop, at next car call, at last car call, inactive
settings, call operation empty cab. car prio. 1.00 NF - at last car call next stop, at next car call, at last car call, inactive
settings, call operation empty cab. bed trans 1.24 NF - at last car call next stop, priority call floor, at next car call, at last car call, at next call
settings, call operation Empty Cabin Visitor 1.34 NF - at last car call Inactive, next stop, at next car call, at last car call
settings, call operation empty cab. land prio 1.00 NF - at last car call next stop, priority call floor, at next car call, at last car call, at next call
settings, call operation empty cab. port.prio [T] 2.03 NF - at last car call next stop, priority call floor, at next car call, at last car call, at next call
settings, call operation empty cab. spec.prio [T] 2.03 NF - at last car call next stop, priority call floor, at next car call, at last car call, at next call
settings, call operation Land. Priority-Ready 1.00 NF 10 s 30 s inactive (1.19), 10 s ...3000 s
settings, call operation landing priority [4] 2.32 S - fix fix, flexible, inactive
settings, call operation More Land.Priorities 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation LandPriority sorting 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: priority sorting)
settings, call operation Land.Prio. Car Mode 2.03 S - call limit time limit, call limit, call/time limit
MPK 400
settings, call operation Land.Prio. CarModTim [T] 2.03 S 1s 30 s 1 s ... 3600 s

settings, call operation Land.Prio.MaxCarCall [T] 2.03 S 1 1 1 ... 96
settings, call operation port.priority-ready 2.03 NF 10 s 30 s inactive, 10 s ...3000 s
settings, call operation porter priority [4] 2.32 S - fix fix, flexible, inactive
settings, call operation more prot. priorities 2.03 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation Port.Prio. Car Mode 2.03 S - call limit time limit, call limit, call/time limit
settings, call operation Port.Prio. CarModTim [T] 2.03 S 1s 30 s 1 s ... 3600 s
settings, call operation Port.Prio.MaxCarCall [T] 2.03 S 1 1 1 ... 96
settings, call operation spec.priority-ready [T] 2.03 NF 10 s 30 s inactive, 10 s ...3000 s
settings, call operation special priority [4] 2.32 S - fix fix, flexible, inactive
settings, call operation more spec. priorities 2.03 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation Spec.Prio. Car Mode [T] 2.03 S - call limit time limit, call limit, call/time limit
settings, call operation Spec.Prio. CarModTim [T] 2.03 S 1s 30 s 1 s ... 3600 s
settings, call operation Spec.Prio.MaxCarCall [T] 2.03 S 1 1 1 ... 96
settings, call operation car prio. call via 1.00 NF - key switch key switch, time limit, call limit, call/time limit, call limit multiple,
specification BS (1.22)
settings, call operation car prio time 1.00 NF 1s 30 s 1s ...300 s
settings, call operation max car prio. calls 1.00 NF 1 1 1 ...(no. of stops -1)
settings, call operation bed transport via 1.24 S - contact ribbon/call contact ribbon/call, call
settings, call operation bed transport [4] 2.32 S - fix fix, flexible, inactive
settings, call operation bed transport ready 1.24 S 10s 30s inactive, 10s ... 3000s
settings, call operation bed transp. contact min. time 1.24 S 1s 2s inactive, 1s ... 10s
settings, call operation Visitor Floor 1.34 NF - 1, 1 1 ... n, 1 ... n
settings, call operation Visitor Travel [4] 2.32 S - fix fix, flexible, inactive
settings, call operation Visitor Ready Time 1.34 NF 10 s 30 s 10 s ...3000 s
settings, call operation More Visitor Calls 1.34 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation End Visit Ready Time at Photoc.inter. 2.09 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation counter call cancel 1.00 S 1s inactive inactive ... 10 s
settings, call operation counter call clear 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, call operation car call cancel 1.00 NF 100ms inactive inactive...2000 ms
settings, call operation anti-nuisance 1.00 NF 1 3 1 ...16
settings, call operation Car Call misusage 1.44 NF - Inactive Inactive, after 1... 5 empty tr.
settings, call operation Destinat. Disp. Misusage Detection 2.24 NF - yes yes, no
settings, call operation selective user ctrl. 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: selective user control)
settings, call operation UserGrp selection at com.fl. 2.33 NF - - at Landing Call, after Door opening
settings, call operation call signal buffer 1.00 NF 10 ms 40 ms 10 ms ...120 ms
settings, call operation emergency travel [4] 2.32 S - fix full collective, down collective, 1 button collective, auto push button,
FIFO-control, destination dispatch (2.12), goods lift (2.19)
settings, call operation VIP travel [4] 2.32 S - fix fix, flexible, inactive
settings, call operation ext. land. calls down 1.00 - - no yes, no
settings, call operation ext. land. calls up 1.00 - - no yes, no
MPK 400
settings, call operation Landing ctrl. off at 1.17 NF - signal low (1.17) signal high, signal low
settings, call operation arrival deviation 2.00 NF 10 s inactive inactive, 10 s ...300 s
settings, call operation further travel delay extension 2.00 NF 1s inactive inactive, 1 s ... 5 s
settings, call operation Car Calls Blocking Counter Direct. 2.08 NF - no yes, no
settings, call operation cancel blocked calls 2.09 NF - yes yes, no
settings, call operation Attendant Ap. Accep. with Car Calls 2.28 NF - yes yes, no
settings, call operation Landing call accept. 2.33 NF - aft. Furth.Trav.Del. aft. Furth.Trav.Del., 2s aft. Door closing
settings, parking active [5] 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, parking parking programm [4] 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, fixed parking floor, flex. parking floor, flex. parking zone, flex.
mainpark.zone, Flex. Main Park. Fl., adaptive (2.26)
settings, parking parking floor int. 1.00 S 1 1 1 ... n
settings, parking parking floor ext. 1.00 S - inactive inactive, from module, from times
settings, parking time interval 1.00 - - - (see functionlist: parking floor extern)
settings, parking parking time 1.00 NF 1s 15 s 0 s ...300 s
settings, parking active at bot. floor (hydraulic lift) 1.33 NF - no yes, no
settings, parking No. of cars at Main Parking Floor 1.23 S 1 1 1 ... 8
settings, safety circuit supervise 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, safety circuit fault at 1.00 NF - low signal low signal, high signal
settings, safety circuit handling of faults 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret & block next floor & block [1], bot. fl. ret & block*, interrupt & block, preopen &
relev. off
settings, simple shaft encoder pulse buffer delay ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms - -
settings, simple shaft encoder pulse reaction time ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms - -
settings, simple shaft encoder correction travel to 1.00 NF - - -
settings, simple shaft encoder correction speed 1.40 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2
settings, simple shaft encoder short floor distance 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, simple shaft encoder impulse up switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, simple shaft encoder impulse down switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, horizontal selector floor level 1.00 NF - direction dependent direction dependent, direction independ.
settings, horizontal selector pulse buffer delay 1.00 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms ...80 ms
settings, horizontal selector pulse reaction time ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 50 ms 10 ms ...150 ms
settings, horizontal selector floor counter 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, horizontal selector impulse at term. floor 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, horizontal selector correct. trav. to 1.00 NF - bottom bottom, top
settings, horizontal selector correction speed 1.40 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2
settings, horizontal selector short floor distance 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, horizontal selector impulse up switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, horizontal selector impulse down switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, vertical selector floor level 1.00 NF - direction dependent direction dependent, direction independ.
settings, vertical selector pulse buffer delay 1.00 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms ... 30 ms ...80 ms
settings, vertical selector pulse reaction time 1.00 NF 10 ms 50 ms 10 ms ... 50 ms ...150 ms
settings, vertical selector floor counter 1.00 NF - no yes, no
MPK 400
settings, vertical selector impulse at term. floor 1.00 NF - no yes, no

settings, vertical selector correct. trav. to 1.00 NF - bottom bottom, top
settings, vertical selector correction speed 1.40 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2
settings, vertical selector short floor distance 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, vertical selector impulse up switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, vertical selector impulse down switch 1.00 NF - - (see functionlist: short floor distances)
settings, digital selector absolute floor level 1.00 - - - -
settings, digital selector fl. level difference 1.00 - - - -
settings, digital selector fl. level correction 1.00 - - - -
settings, digital selector v5 off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector v5 off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, digital selector start spd. v1 from 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, digital selector start spd. v2 from 1.00 NF - 1 mm inactive, ... mm
settings, digital selector start spd. v4 form 1.00 NF - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, digital selector output ref. point (only MDSK) 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, digital selector output ref. point (only SEM DSK) 2.32 NF - no no, at. pos v0, at pos. vfast
settings, digital selector distance ref. point (only MDSK) 1.00 - - 1 mm [7] -
settings, digital selector travel height 1.00 - - 0 cm 0 cm
settings, digital selector vInsp. off at (only SEM DSK) 2.32 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2
settings, digital selector pulse buffer delay ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms ...80 ms
settings, digital selector correct. trav. to 1.00 NF - bottom bottom, top
settings, digital selector correction speed 1.40 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5
settings, digital selector Lev.Offset Tolerance 1.42 NF 1 mm inactive inactive ... 100 mm
settings, digital selector Level Offset Limit 1.42 NF 1 mm inactive inactive ... 200 mm
settings, digital selector Lev.Offset Handling 1.42 NF - no reaction no reaction, interrupt, interrupt & block, bot. fl. ret. & block
settings, digital selector learning trav. speed 1.00 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5
settings, digital selector learning activated 1.00 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system absolute floor level 1.00 - - - -
MPK 400
settings, absolute pos.-system fl. level difference 1.00 - - - -

settings, absolute pos.-system fl. level correction 1.00 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system v5 off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system v5 off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system start spd. v1 from 1.00 - - inactive inactive, ... mm
settings, absolute pos.-system start spd. v2 from 1.00 - - 1 mm inactive, ... mm
settings, absolute pos.-system output ref. point 1.00 NF - no no, at. pos v0, at pos. vfast
settings, absolute pos.-system area of level output ±...mm 1.17 NF - 50 mm 50 .. 250mm
settings, absolute pos.-system travel height 1.00 S - 0 cm -
settings, absolute pos.-system vInsp. off at 1.00 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2
settings, absolute pos.-system Lev.Offset Tolerance 1.42 NF 1 mm inactive inactive ... 100 mm
settings, absolute pos.-system Level Offset Limit 1.42 NF 1 mm inactive inactive ... 200 mm
settings, absolute pos.-system Lev.Offset Handling 1.42 NF - no reaction no reaction, interrupt, interrupt & block, bot. fl. ret. & block
settings, absolute pos.-system pulse buffer delay 1.00 NF 10 ms 30 ms 10 ms .... 80 ms
settings, absolute pos.-system learning travel speed 1.00 NF - v2 v0, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5
settings, absolute pos.-system encoder type 1.00 NF - 25 Bit 24 Bit, 25 Bit
settings, absolute pos.-system install encoder 1.00 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system encoder adjustment 1.00 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system learning activated 1.00 - - - -
settings, absolute pos.-system vInsp. off down 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system vInsp. off up 1.00 S - 0 mm -
settings, absolute pos.-system APS-Learn. operation 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, hydraulic lift direct start 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, hydraulic lift YD change over timer 1.00 NF 0.1 s 2s 0.1 s ...10 s
settings, hydraulic lift motor delayed off upward after ... ms 1.41 NF 10 ms 400 ms 0 ms ...1500 ms
settings, hydraulic lift motor delayed off downw. after ... ms 1.41 NF 10 ms 0 ms 0 ms ...1500 ms
settings, hydraulic lift inspection speed 1.00 NF - v0 v0, v1, v2
MPK 400
settings, hydraulic lift delay after ...s 1.00 NF 1s 2s 1 s ... 5 s

settings, hydraulic lift thermistor 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret. & block, interrupt & block, stop at next
floor, interrupt
settings, hydraulic lift PTC output (motor) 1.00 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, variable freq. AC v-fast delayed on after 1.00 NF 10 ms 200 ms 0 ms ...500 ms
settings, variable freq. AC contactors delayed off after 1.00 NF 10 ms 600 ms 0 ms ...5.000 ms
settings, variable freq. AC v-slow delayed off 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, variable freq. AC regulator fault 1.00 NF - interrupt interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, variable freq. AC thermistor 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, stop at next
floor, interrupt
settings, variable freq. AC PTC output (motor) 1.00 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, variable freq. AC motor ventilation 1.00 NF 1s inactive inactive ...600 s
settings, variable freq. AC vInsp. at Emergency Electrical Operation 1.04 NF - no yes, no
settings, variable freq. AC Field enable on 1.36 NF 100 ms inactive inactive ...1,5 s
settings, variable freq. AC Field enable off 1.43 NF 1s 1s w/o Delay (2.09), 1 s ... 60 s
settings, variable freq. AC Fast Start 2.19 S - no yes, no
settings, AC unregulated direction delayed on after ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms - -
settings, AC unregulated inspection speed, fast 1.00 NF - - -
settings, AC unregulated thermistor 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret & block [1], interrupt & block, stop at next
floor, interrupt
settings, AC unregulated ptc output (motor) 1.00 NF - - -
settings, AC unregulated motor ventilation 1.00 NF 1s - -
settings, hydr. variable freq. v-fast delayed on after ... ms 1.00 NF 10 ms 200 ms 0 ms ...500 ms
settings, hydr. variable freq. brake delayed on after 1.00 NF 10 ms 0 ms 0 ms ... 2.000 ms
settings, hydr. variable freq. brake delayed off after 1.00 NF 10 ms 0 ms 0 ms ... 2.000 ms
settings, hydr. variable freq. contactors del. off 1.00 NF 10 ms 600 ms 0 ms ...5.000 ms
settings, hydr. variable freq. v-slow delayed off 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, hydr. variable freq. motor off at 1.00 NF - regulator stop regulator stop, floor level
settings, hydr. variable freq. brake drop delay 1.00 NF - un-delayed un-delayed, delayed
settings, hydr. variable freq. regulator fault 1.00 NF - interrupt interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, hydr. variable freq. thermistor 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block next florr & block, bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, stop at next
floor, interrupt
settings, hydr. variable freq. PTC output (motor) 1.00 NF - high signal high signal, low signal
settings, hydr. variable freq. vInsp. at Emergency Electrical Operation 1.04 NF - no yes, no
settings, regulator remote set-up 1.00 NF - - -
settings, travel monitor contactor monitor active 1.00 NF - 1s ínactive´ ... 5s
settings, travel monitor start time monitor ...s 1.00 NF 1s 12 s inactive ...30 s
settings, travel monitor journey time monitor ... s 1.00 NF 1s 15 s inactive ...45 s
settings, travel monitor braking time monitor 1.00 NF 1s 20 s inactive ...30 s
settings, travel monitor handling of faults 1.00 NF - bot. fl. ret. & block bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, interrupt, no reaction
settings, travel monitor brake monitoring 1.41 NF 100ms 1500 ms Inactive, 100ms, 6000ms (2.19)
MPK 400
settings, travel monitor fault brake monitoring 1.00 NF - interrupt & block interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, travel monitor brake monitoring at (signal) 1.45 NF - low signal high signal, low signal
settings, travel monitor Prim. Safe. Circ. Fault 1.06 NF - interrupt interrupt, interrupt & block
settings, travel monitor final limit switch 1.00 NF - specification EN specification EN, specefication TRA
settings, travel monitor Car module-monitor fault 1.27 S - Interrupt Interrupt, Interrupt & Block
settings, travel monitor vRescue 2.32 S - 0,63m/s 0,01 - 0,63m/s
settings, travel monitor Main Curr. Delay Off 1.22 NF - 3s Inactive - 10 s
settings, travel monitor Temperature Monitor 1.43 NF - bot. fl. ret & block next floor & block, bot. fl. ret & block [1], interrupt & block, stop at next
floor, interrupt
settings, travel monitor Output Temp. Monitor 1.43 NF - high signal low signal, high signal
settings, relevelling active 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, relevelling type 1.00 S - at floor level at floor level, with recall switch, recall switch to floor
settings, relevelling Relevelling Up On [8] 1.00 NF - 100 mm (DSK), 50 mm -
(APS)
settings, relevelling Relevelling Up Off [8] 1.00 NF - 100 mm (DSK), 50 mm -
(APS)
settings, relevelling Relevelling Down On [8] 1.00 NF - 100 mm (DSK), 50 mm -
(APS)
settings, relevelling Relevelling Down Off [8] 1.00 NF - 100 mm (DSK), 50 mm -
(APS)
settings, relevelling time limits 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, relevelling max time upwards 1.00 NF 1s 20 s 1 s ... 20 s
settings, relevelling max time downwards 1.00 NF 1s 20 s 1 s ... 20 s
settings, relevelling attempt limit 1.00 NF - yes yes, no
settings, relevelling max. relevelling up 1.00 NF 1x 20 x 5 ... 20 x
settings, relevelling max relevelling down 1.00 NF 1x 20 x 5 ... 20 x
settings, relevelling attempt limit -fl. 1 (hydr. lift) 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, relevelling no. exceeded 1.00 S - bot. fl. ret. & block interrupt & block, bot. fl. ret. & block [1], no new relevelling
settings, relevelling monitoring v<0,3m/s 1.06 NF - no yes, no
settings, relevelling handling of faults 1.00 S - bot. fl. ret. & block bot. fl. ret. & block [1], interrupt & block, interrupt
settings, relevelling relevel. on overload 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, relevelling type (DSK) 1.22 NF - With Dig. Selector With Dig. Selector,With Recall Switch
settings, relevelling delayed on after ... s 2.21 NF 0,1 s 0,0 s 0,0 s ... 10,0 s
settings, pawl device polarity bolts Li.Sw 1.17 NF - high signal high signal, low signal
settings, pawl device bolt interv. bottom vs. Fl.lev. 1.17 NF - 0 mm 0 ... 500 mm
settings, pawl device bolt interv. top vs. Fl.lev. 1.17 NF - 0 mm 0 ... 500 mm
settings, pawl device bolt deactivation 1.17 NF - at overrun area at overrun area, at actual position, at Start
settings, pawl device motor delayed off after 1.17 NF - 0 ms 0 ... 2000 ms
settings, pawl device travel monitor bolt reversal timer 1.17 NF - 20 s 1 ... 120 s
settings, pawl device travel monitor bolt touchdown timer 1.17 NF - 20 s 1 ... 120 s
settings, pawl device travel monitor low pressure timer 1.17 NF - 20 s 1 ... 120 s
MPK 400
settings, pawl device travel monitor bolt activation timer 1.17 NF - 20 s 1 ... 120 s
settings, pawl device travel monitor bolt deactivat. timer 1.17 NF - 20 s 1 ... 120 s
settings, Call Blocking block 1.00 S - inactive inactive, from module, time interval
settings, Call Blocking time interval 1.00 S - - (see functionlist: door blocking)
settings, transponder/reader key read 1.00 NF - - -
settings, transponder/reader key block 1.00 NF - - -
settings, transponder/reader key set limit 1.04 S - no yes, no
settings, transponder/reader commandset connect 1.04 S - - -
settings, transponder/reader key delete 1.00 NF - - -
settings, remote monitoring remote monitor ID 2.01 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Tel.No Modem PC 2.01 S - - ( see functionlist: remote control )
settings, remote monitoring modem configuration 2.01 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Modem basic Config. 2.01 S - - (see functionlist: remote control)
settings, remote monitoring Pass. Inc.Call after ... Bellsignals 1.00 S - 1 1 ... 8
settings, remote monitoring GPRS-PIN 2.09 S - - -
settings, remote monitoring GPRS-Accesspoint 2.09 S - - -
Settings, Remote Monitoring Testcall 2.06 S - - -
settings, net installation floor commission 1.00 S - no yes, no
settings, net installation door commision 1.00 NF - no yes, no
settings, autom. function test interval 1.00 S - inactive inactive, 1 week, 2 weeks, 4 weeks
settings, autom. function test next date 1.00 S - 1 jan 2000 00:00 -
settings, autom. function test completion 1.00 S - inactive (test alarm button, leveling offset test, test door open butt.)
settings, autom. function test activate immediately 1.00 S - - -
settings, group group operation 1.23 S - yes yes, no
settings, group start monitor 1.23 NF 1s 30 s inactive ... 60 s
settings, group trip counter analyse 2.00 S - yes yes, no
settings, group group splitting 1.31 NF - - -
settings, Load weighing system nominal load 1.33 - - 0 kg 65530 kg
settings, Load weighing system Define measur. point 1.33 - - - -
settings, Load weighing system install encoder 1.33 - - - -
settings, Load weighing system Encoder Calibration 1.34 - - - -
settings, Load weighing system Delete measur. point 1.33 - - - -
settings, Load weighing system rope compensation active 2.10 S - no yes, no
settings, Load weighing system rope compensation bottom 2.10 S - - -
settings, Load weighing system rope compensation top 2.10 S - - -
settings, Load weighing system rope compensation delete measure 2.10 S - - -
settings, Load weighing system Car Empty 1.33 - - Inactive Inactive ... 200 %
settings, Load weighing system Minimum Load 1.33 - - Inactive Inactive ... 200 %
settings, Load weighing system Full Load 1.33 - - Inactive Inactive ... 200 %
settings, Load weighing system Overload 1.33 - - Inactive Inactive ... 200 %
MPK 400
settings, load weighing system load weight level at (signal) 1.24 S - High Signal High Signal, Low Signal
settings, traffic pattern Activation 1.24 S - inactive inactive, with progr. input, from times, with traffic analys.
settings, traffic pattern time interv. up peak 1.24 S - - (see functionlist: traffic pattern)
settings, traffic pattern time interv. dw peak 1.24 S - - (see functionlist: traffic pattern)
settings, traffic pattern with starting floor 1.24 NF - no yes, no
settings, traffic pattern Counter Call blocked 1.24 NF - no yes, no
settings, traffic pattern automatic at ... % call-requests 1.24 NF - 50% 10 ... 100%
settings, traffic pattern automatic at ... % loadchange 1.34 NF - 50% 1 ... 100%
settings, traffic pattern Door Reverse to Call 1.30 S - yes yes, no
settings, traffic pattern Peak-Up at Mainfloor Start at % load 2.14 NF - 0% 0 % ... 100 %
settings, traffic pattern Peak-Up at Mainfloor Max.Wait.Time 2.14 NF - inactive inactive, 1s ... 300 s
settings, vehicle transport activation 2.12 S - no yes, no, via terminal
settings, vehicle transport empty cabine 2.12 NF - at last car call next stop, at next car call, at last car call, inactive
settings, vehicle transport readiness time 2.12 S 10s 10s 10s ... 300s
settings, vehicle transport level car sensors 2.12 S - signal low signal high, signal low
settings, vehicle transport flashing sig. RED at target floor 2.12 S - no yes, no
settings, vehicle transport flashing sig.GREEN bef. closing 2.12 S 1s inactive inactive, 1..20 s
settings, vehicle transport signal STOP delayed on 2.12 S 1s w/o delay w/o delay, 1..5 s
settings, vehicle transport signals off at rest 2.27 S 1s inactive inactive, 1..600 s
settings, disabled travel Call Operation 2.29 S - inactive inactive, independ on direction, depend on direction, priority
settings, disabled travel Dwell Time 2.29 NF 1 8s 1 s ... 60 s
settings, disabled travel Empty Cabin Prio 2.29 NF - at last car call next stop, priority call floor, at next car call, at last car call, at next call
settings, disabled travel priority-ready 2.29 NF 10 s 30 s inactive, 10 s ...3000 s
settings, disabled travel priority [4] 2.32 S - fix fix, flexible, inactive
settings, disabled travel more priorities 2.29 S - no yes, no
settings, disabled travel Priority Car Mode 2.29 S - call limit time limit, call limit, call/time limit
settings, disabled travel Prior. Car Mode Time 2.29 S 1s 30 s 1 s ... 3600 s
settings, disabled travel Prio. Max. Car Calls 2.29 S 1 1 1 ... 96
settings, Online-Display Date / Time Display 2.29 S - no yes, no
settings, Online-Display Run.Time/Trip Count. Display 2.29 S - no yes, no
settings, Online-Display New Events Display 2.29 S - no yes, no
Testing/Maintenance, Presetting Door Blocking 1.19 S - no yes,no
Testing/Maintenance, Presetting save events 1.19 S - yes yes,no
Testing/Maintenance, Presetting test travel speed 1.24 S - vEmergency Elec.Oper vInspection, vEmergency Elec.Oper, v1, v2, v3, v4, v5
Testing/Maintenance, Presetting Alarm-Filter 1.32 S - yes yes, no, no w. Alarm&Do.Op.Bu (2.32)
Testing/Maintenance, Completion door control 1.19 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion start time monitor 1.19 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion journey time monitor 1.19 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion braking time monitor 1.19 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion reset travmonit. err 1.19 - - -
MPK 400
Testing/Maintenance, Completion speed-monitoring 1.19 - - -

Testing/Maintenance, Completion final limit switch 1.19 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion traction 1.19 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion weight balance 1.24 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion car safety gear 1.24 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion counterw.safety gear 1.24 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion test buffers 1.22 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion over-speed 1.24 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion set call 1.19 - - -
Testing/Maintenance, Completion Synchronous Motor phasing 2.27 - - -
power safe mode, presetting activation level 1 after ... mins 2.15 NF 1 min inactive inactive ...60 mins
power safe mode, presetting safe level 2 2.25 S - via interval via timer, via interval, via timer & interval
power safe mode, presetting activation level 2 after ... mins 2.25 NF 1 min inactive inactive ...60 mins
power safe mode, presetting safe level 2 interval 2.15 S - - (see functionlist: power safe mode, safe level 2 interval)
power safe mode, presetting lev. 2 to normal op. delay time ... s 2.15 NF 1s inactive inactive ...60 s
power safe mode, presetting restart time level 2 ... mins 2.25 NF 1 min 30 mins inactive ...120 mins
power safe mode, presetting power safe floor 2.15 NF - inactive inactive, 1 ... n
power safe mode, presetting Save Level 2 quit at ... calls 2.21 NF - 10 not with calls, 1 ... 50
optimisation, completion decel. distance 2.26 S - - -
optimisation, completion doortimes 2.26 S - - -
optimisation, completion parking/read.service 2.26 S - - -
optimisation, completion power safe mode 2.26 S - - -
optimisation, print results decel. distance 2.26 S - - -
optimisation, print results doortimes 2.26 S - - -
optimisation, print results parking/read.service 2.26 S - - -
optimisation, print results power safe mode 2.26 S - - -
MPK 40 / 400
Technical description

KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 28.11.2011 / DO_TB4DH_GB

MPK 40 / 400
Contents
1 General notice ...............................................................................................................4
2 Operating- and control- modules .................................................................................4
2.1 BST 40 (MPK 40)................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Terminal set-up on the top side ........................................................................................ 5
2.1.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side .................................................................................. 5
2.2 BST 400 (MPK 400)............................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Terminal set-up on the top side ........................................................................................ 7
2.2.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side .................................................................................. 8
2.2.3 Extension module EM 16C............................................................................................... 9
3 BST Relay-modules.....................................................................................................10
3.1 BSTV 40 (MPK 40 / MPK 400).............................................................................................. 10
4 Modules Overview.......................................................................................................12
4.1 Main module (HK 24) .......................................................................................................... 12
4.2 Extension modules (EK 24 / EK 08).................................................................................... 13
4.3 HK 24 / EK 24 / EK 08 terminating and extending .............................................................. 15
4.4 Socket prints MSP 24 / MSP 08 / ISP 34 ............................................................................. 16
4.5 Floor - module (ETG B004-V2)............................................................................................ 17
4.6 Floor - module (ETG B004-V3)............................................................................................ 19
4.7 LON - Processor - module (LPK-A002)............................................................................ 21
4.8 Construction and default set-up of the modules FKF / IRP / ETG / IKL............................. 21
4.9 Car and car call-module (FKI)............................................................................................. 23
4.10 Car and car call-module (FKP01) ....................................................................................... 24
4.10.1 FKP-Interface 01 ......................................................................................................... 25
4.10.2 FKP-Interface 02 ......................................................................................................... 27
4.11 Car and car call-module (FKP02) ....................................................................................... 30
4.12 Car module FKF 40 ............................................................................................................ 33
4.13 Hall lantern module WFA 40 .............................................................................................. 34
4.14 Interface module IM 40 – 01 / 1,5 qmm .............................................................................. 36
4.21 Interface module IM 40 - V.24............................................................................................. 50
4.22 Interface module W 40 – IF 002.......................................................................................... 51
5 Technical data .............................................................................................................53
5.1 Power supply MPK ............................................................................................................. 53
5.2 Power supply control (24 VDC) .......................................................................................... 53
III / 2 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
5.3 Drawing of current (modules).............................................................................................53

5.4 Monitoring PTC ...................................................................................................................53
5.5 Inputs ..................................................................................................................................54
5.6 Outputs ...............................................................................................................................54
6 Overview of the modules in the MPK-Systems..........................................................55
28.11.2011 III / 3
MPK 40 / 400
1 General notice
Unless otherwise expressly stated in this description, the inputs are “high active”. This means if there is a
voltage of +24V at the input, the input is detected as set and the signal further processed.
Note: Ground the network shielding (SLON and GLON) only one-sided.
2 Operating- and control- modules

2.1 BST 40 (MPK 40)
RDA
TDA
FST
0VA
500
200
501
201
PE
LS
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
LT
LT
+
-
B
LT
D
A
TERM
C
ZRAM
E ON
OFF
EPROM-O
H
EPROM-U
F
G
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
207
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
507
N U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 N1
A Ribbon cable to relay board BSTV

B Socket for IM 40-V.24 (serial module)
C Setting of display contrast
D Delete key, the function is not currently utilised
E Bus-termination, the jumper must be in the ON position!
F Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
G Switch “Landing call off“ (S35)
H LED-indicators
III / 4 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
2.1.1 Terminal set-up on the top side
Term. Serial interface (Option) Term. Free programmable inputs

TDA Data interface A (transmit) E1 Contactor monitor (set-up fixed)
0VA Data interface A E2 Safety circuit *
RDA Data interface A (receive) E3 Zone safety circuit *
E4 Control panel test on *
E5 Control panel test up *
E6 Control panel test down *
E7 Shutdown light off *
E8 Monitoring light voltage *
* Default set-up
the input performance is “low active“; i.e. input = +24 V: the input is not recognised as set
input = 0 V: the input is recognised as set
the input performance is set via the menu (“low active“, “high active“)
Term. Power supply Term. Network interface

500 Supply, control (ground) LS Shielding, network, control
200 Supply, control (+24V) LT network, control
501 Supply, lift cage (ground) LT network, control
201 Supply, lift cage (+24V)
- Feed, external power pack (ground)
+ Feed, external power pack (+24V)
PE Protective conductor
FST Fault voltage test
2.1.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side
Term. Query safety circuit Term. Free programmable outputs

N Neutral conductor (connection) A1 Re-levelling / decelerate *
U1 Power monitoring (fuse F1) A2 Shutdown light off *
U2 Passive safety circuit A3 Bridge S10 *
U3 Emergency stop A4 Collective fault register *
U4 Landing door contacts A5 In use light *
U5 Lift car door contacts A6 Out of service *
U6 Lock contacts A7 Lock magnet *
N1 Neutral conductor (transmission) A8 Valve control *
* Default set-up
Term. Landing calls Term. Landing calls

207 +24V (1,5 A) R5 Landing call 5
R1 Landing call 1 R6 Landing call 6
R4 Landing call 4 507 Ground
the output performance is “low active“; i.e. output = +24 V: the function is not active
output = 0 V: the function is active
28.11.2011 III / 5
MPK 40 / 400
2.2 BST 400 (MPK 400)
B C
A
RDA
LSG
LTG
LTG
TDA
LSS
FST
LTS
LTS
0VA
500
200
501
201
BH
PE
BL
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
+
-
D
Kanal A
Kanal B J
G Service
J1
H
J2
J3
E F
I
MDSK / APS
N
EB
K
L
ZRAM L R
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
N U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 N1
III / 6 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
A Switch „Landing call off“ (S35)

B LED-indicators
C Setting of display contrast
D Ribbon cable to relay board BSTV
E Jumper 1: Kollmorgen Shaftbus, Jumper 2 – 3: the function is not currently utilised
F Socket for IM 40-V.24 (serial module)
G Socket for DSK / APS (absolute position system)
H LED for increm. encoder channel DSK and Service-LED for SLON-connection*
I Socket for GLON-LPK
J Ribbon cable to extension module
K Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
L I²C-interface
M Set-up for Eprom-size, the function is not currently utilised
N LED of Kollmorgen Shaftbus communication
*Service-LED: If the board is functioning correctly, the LED flashes briefly when the control is switched on.
If the LED does not light up or remains constantly lit, a hardware error has occurred at the SLON-
connection. Please replace the BST-module with a new BST-module.
2.2.1 Terminal set-up on the top side

Term. Serial interface (Option) Term. DSK / APS / DCP
TDA Data interface A (transmit) 81 DSK-Reference-point-output*
0VA Data interface A 82 DSK-Zone
RDA Data interface A (receive) 83 Increm. encoder chan. A (DSK) / Data + (APS)
84 Increm. encoder chan. B (DSK) / Data - (APS)
85 Clock + (APS)
86 Clock - (APS)
87 DCP +
88 DCP -
*APS – Reference-point-output is only as free
programmable output on EM no. 17 available (see chap. 2.2.3)

500 Supply, control (ground) BL Kollmorgen Shaftbus (BUS low)
200 Supply, control (+24V) BH Kollmorgen Shaftbus (BUS high)
501 Supply, lift cage (ground) LSS Shielding, network, control
201 Supply, lift cage (+24V) LTS network, control
- Feed, external power pack (ground) LTS network, control
+ Feed, external power pack (+24V) LSG Shielding, network, group
PE Protective conductor LTG network, group
FST Fault voltage test LTG network, group
28.11.2011 III / 7
MPK 40 / 400
2.2.2 Terminal set-up on the bottom side
Term. Query safety circuit Term. Free programmable inputs

N Neutral conductor (connection) E1 Contactor monitor (set-up fixed)
U1 Power monitoring (fuse F1) E2 Safety circuit *
U2 Passive safety circuit E3 Zone safety circuit *
U3 Emergency stop E4 Control panel test on *
U4 Landing door contacts E5 Control panel test up *
U5 Lift car door contacts E6 Control panel test down *
U6 Lock contacts E7 Shutdown light off *
N1 Neutral conductor (transmission) E8 Monitoring light voltage *
* Default set-up
Term. Free programmable outputs

A1 Re-levelling / decelerate *
A2 Shutdown light off *
A3 Bridge S10 *
A4 Collective fault register *
A5 In use light *
A6 Out of service *
A7 Door fault message *
A8 Valve control *
* Default set-up
the input performance is set via the menu (“low active“, “high active“)
the output performance is “low active“; i.e. output = +24 V: the function is not active
output = 0 V: the function is active
III / 8 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
2.2.3 Extension module EM 16C

The extension module provides the flexible assembly of the BST 400. Additions to the range of signals,
inputs, outputs and calls are handled by these modules.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
9
-
B
-
+
A
Y
0 1 0 1
9 9
0-7
7 8
7 8
2 3
2 3
5 6
4
8, 9 5 6
4
C
D 24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A Ribbon cable to BST or next extension module

B Power supply 24VDC
C LED of the 24V power supply
D rotary coding switch for the set-up of the extension module no. 0 – 7*
* set-up only for the unit place. The menue displays the module with no. 10 – 17.
Notice for the set-up of extension module no. 17!

The set-up of the terminals 1 – 8 is fixed! The term. 9 – 16 don’t have a set-up. If you need the signals: ”V-R (electr.
emerg. operat.), V3, V4, V5, APS-Reference-point-output”, you have to use the terminals 9 – 16 on module no. 17!
Term. Set-up extension module no. 17 Term. Set-up extension module no. 17
1 v-relev. (output) 9 Free
2 v0 (output) 10 Free
3 v-Inspection (output) 11 Free
6 Regulator fault (input) 14 Free
7 Regulator electr. stop (input) 15 Free
8 Regulator enable (input) 16 Free
Diameters:
X Y Height* * incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
65 mm 125 mm 56 mm
28.11.2011 III / 9
MPK 40 / 400
3 BST Relay-modules
3.1 BSTV 40 (MPK 40 / MPK 400)
151
152
155
156
PTC
A
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
K 31
B
K 32
K 33
K 34 6
5
21 22 23
K 34
3
K 33
2
K 32
K 35
K 31
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
A Indicator for motor-PTC. The LED illuminates if the PTC resistor has not been triggered.
B Connection to BST 40 / 400
Term. PTC input Term. Relay board / free program. relay

151 Motor PTC 11-20 Outputs of pilot control relay K31 - K34
152 21-23 Free program. relay K35
155 Open: hydraulic drive
156 Bridged: cable drive
Term. Drive LRV, ...

1 Travel
2 Up (...K 31)
3 Down (...K 32)
4 Fast (...K 33)
5 Star / delta (...K 34)
6 v½
III / 10 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
With hydraulic systems, in addition to the program-controlled switching-off of the upward signal
(K31), a forced switching-off by the motor PTC resistor monitoring is carried out.
Terminals “155“ and “156“ bridged (function = OFF):

“K31“ not switched off by the PTC resistor unit for the motor PTC
Setting for all cable drives
155
156
Terminals “155“ and “156“ bridged (function = ON):

“K31“ forced switch-off by the PTC resistor unit for the motor PTC
155
156
Default setting for all hydraulic drives
The input circuit (PTC) has a switching hysteresis (s. chap. techn. data).
Connection layout and internal circuit, pilot control / free program. relay:
K31 K32 K33 K34
Bridge K35
11
14 12
Terminals on
BSTV 40 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
AC-unregulated K1 K2 K3 K4 Free select.

Hydraulic K11 K2 Valve fast K13 K12 Speed fast
variable freq. AC * 1 2 * 3 Free select.
Hydr. variable freq. * 1 2 4 Free select.
* only MPK 400 * Bridge dependent on regulator
1 Drive 2 Safety contactor 3 Brake 4 Enable of precontrol hydraulic
28.11.2011 III / 11
MPK 40 / 400
4 Modules Overview
4.1 Main module (HK 24)
The main module is a multi-purpose I/O PCD. The I/Os can be connected as inputs, outputs or calls.
The functionality of the module (FKF / IRP / ETG / IKL) is given by the EPROM on the LPK module that is
plugged into the HK24-module.
The signal connection is done via the base modules. The arrangement of the 24 terminals are displayed
and can be changed on the display of the BST.
The main module is extendible via the extension modules (EK24, EK08) which provide additional I/Os.
Notice if no extension module is plugged to the main module, both ribbon cable terminals have to be
connected via a ribbon cable bridge. This ensures proper operation of the module.
E
B
B 5V D
A C
Y
F
LS
LT
LT
200
500
210
500
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A Delete key for location information of (floor-) module ETG M24

B Socket for LPK
C Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
D Terminal for extension module or termination
E Terminal for termination
F Socket for base module
Indicators:
LED B illuminated: The power supply is switched to the output drives.
LED 5V illuminated: The power supply for the logic devices is present.
III / 12 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400

500 Ground LS Shielding, network
200 +24V LT Connection, network
LT Connection, network
Term. Output pow. Sup. (via base module) Term. Inputs / outputs (via base module)
500 Ground 1 - 24 Output
210 +24V 1 - 24 Input
Diameters:
X Y height* height** * incl. plastic panel
161 mm 106 mm 44 mm 56 mm ** incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
4.2 Extension modules (EK 24 / EK 08)

The extension module is a multi-purpose I/O PCD. The I/Os can be connected as inputs, outputs or calls.
The module is used for an I/O-extension of the main module. The signal connection is done via the base
modules.
The arrangement of the 24 terminals are displayed and can be changed on the display of the BST.
Notice if no extension module is plugged to the main module, both ribbon cable terminals have to be
connected via a ribbon cable bridge. This ensures proper operation of the module.
X X
A B C A B C
B B
5V 5V
Y
Y
200
500
200
500
D D
210
500
210
500
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
EK 24 EK 08
28.11.2011 III / 13
MPK 40 / 400
A Connection to main module (HK) or extension module (EK)

B Terminal for extension module or termination
C Terminal for termination
D Socket for base module
Indicators:
LED B illuminated: The power supply is switched to the output drives.
LED 5V illuminated: The power supply for the logic devices is present.
Extension module 24:

Term. Power supply Term. Output power supply (via base module)
500 Ground 500 Ground
200 +24V 210 +24V
Term. Inputs / outputs (via base module)

25-48* Output
25-48* Input
* the terminal-no. is depended on the number of extension modules
Diameters:
Extension module 08:

Term. Power supply Term. Output power supply (via base module)
200 +24V 210 +24V
Term. Inputs / outputs (via base module)

25-32* Output
25-32* Input
* the terminal-no. is depended on the number of extension modules
Diameters:
III / 14 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.3 HK 24 / EK 24 / EK 08 terminating and extending

The termination terminates the signal-bus and avoids disturbing signal reflections.
HK without extension module (EK)

A
B
5V
HK 24
HK with an extension module (EK)

B A
B
5V
EK24 / EK08
200
500
HK 24
HK with two extension modules (EK

B B A
B
5V
EK24 EK08
200
500
200
500
HK 24
A Connection for termination

B Connection HK-EK or EK-EK
28.11.2011 III / 15
MPK 40 / 400
4.4 Socket prints MSP 24 / MSP 08 / ISP 34
MSP 24 MSP 08
A A
B B
210
500
210
500
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ISP 34
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A Sockets for interconnecting the HK or EK

B LED-row displays the actual status of the I/Os
C 34- pol. Ribbon cable terminal
Pin Ribbon cable terminal* (ISP 34) Pin Ribbon cable* (ISP 34)
1 500 (ground) 18 Display segment 7
2 +24V 19 Arrow up
3 Call 1 20 Arrow down
4 Call 2 21 Gong
5 Call 3 22 Priority call (car)
6 Call 4 23 T1*
7 Call 5 24 T2*
8 Call 6 25 T3*
9 Call 7 26 T4*
10 Door open push button 27 T5*
11 Door close push button 28 Alarm LQ**
12 Display segment 1 29 Alarm NO**
13 Display segment 2 30 Alarm C**
14 Display segment 3 31 Emergency light +**
15 Display segment 4 32 Emergency light -**
16 Display segment 5 33 +24V
17 Display segment 6 34 500 (ground)
* Arrangement according to comp. Kronenberg / comp. Schäfer ** additional signals on Combicon terminals for further connection
Term. Combicon terminal (ISP 34) Term. Combicon terminal (ISP 34)
1–5 T1 – T5 8 Alarm C
6 Alarm LQ 9 Emergency light +
7 Alarm NO 10 Emergency light -
MSP 24 / 08: ISP 34:

Term. Type Term. Type
210 / 510 Combicon [0,2 - 2,5 mm²] 1 – 10 Combicon [0,2 - 2,5 mm²]
1 – 24 / 1 - 8 Mini-Combicon [0,14 - 1,5 mm²]
III / 16 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.5 Floor - module (ETG B004-V2)
5V R1 R2
A B
LED J3 R3
LT A
A3 E3
LT ETGB ...
Y
200
500 A4 E4
B
A5 A6
C A7 A8
A Program version
B LED “Service“
C Delete key for the location of the floor module
Function: Landing calls, hall lantern up/down, ....
Mounting location: Shaft, depended on floors and door sides

500 Ground LT Connection, network
Term. Calls (default set-up) Term. input (default set-up)

R1 Call up E3* Free
R2 Call down E4** Free
R3* Free
Term. output (default set-up) Term. output (default set-up)

A3* Free A6 Hall lantern down grp.no. ***
A4** Free A7 Hall lantern up grp.no. 2
A5 Hall lantern up grp.no. *** A8 Hall lantern down grp.no. 2
** A4 or E4 useable *** Grp.No. is the same like the number into the menu
* the function is depended on the set-up of jumper J3: Set-up of the Ultrex terminals:
A B E ... A ... R ...

J3 R3 J3 R3 2 11 2 1 3 2 1
A3 E3 A3 E3
Jumper position A: E(2) = +24V; E(1) = input

A3 = output and E3 = input; R3 no function A(2) = output; A(1) = ground
Jumper position B: R(3) = +24V; R(2) = inp. / outp.
R3 = call; A3 and E3 no function R(1) = ground
28.11.2011 III / 17
MPK 40 / 400
Terminals Type
LT / 200 / 500 Mini- Combicon 0,14 - 1,5 [mm²]
Terminaldescription
Device MPK-menu * Default set-up Note
R1 1 (C) Call up
R2 2 (C) Call down
R3 3 (X) Free
E3 3 (X) Free [1]
A3 4 (O) Free [1]
E4/A4 5 (U) Free [2]
A5 6 (O) Hall lantern up grp.no.* [3]
A6 7 (O) Hall lantern down grp.no.* [3]
A7 8 (O) Hall lantern up grp.no 2
A8 9 (O) Hall lantern down grp.no 2
*terminaltype: (C) = call (input and output); (X) = call or input; (U) = input or output; (O) = output
[1]: The input and output terminals are available in the menu, if the call terminal R3 is free and
the jumper J3 is in the position A!
[2]: Either input or output!
[3]: * = current group-no. see menue setting
Indicators:
• LED “5V“: is illuminated if the power supply for the logic devices is switched on.
• LED “Service“: flashes once on switch on and during actuation of the Delete switch.
A permanent flashing or a permanent illumination of that LED indicates:
the module is defective and has to be exchanged.
13,5
all data in [mm]
Diameters:
X Y Height*
103 mm 47 mm 17,5 mm
Scale drawing for the drill holes ETG B004:
A M3-bolt or drill: 3,2
15,1 83,2 4,7 All data in [mm]
A A
23,5 23,5
III / 18 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.6 Floor - module (ETG B004-V3)
Service
LS
LT
LT
5V
O1
C1
LT
200
O2
C2
500 A B
Y
500
O3
C3
200
LT C
IO5
O4
LT ETGB ...
LS
A Delete key for the location of the floor module

B LED indicators
C Program version
Function: Landing calls, hall lantern up/down, ....
Mounting location: Shaft, depended on floors and door sides

500 Ground LS Shielding network
LT Connection, network
Term. Output (default set-up) Term. Call, in-/output (default set-up)

O1 Hall lantern up grp.no. *** C1 Call up
O2 Hall lantern down grp.no. *** C2 Call down
O3 Hall lantern up grp.no. 2 C3* free
O4 Hall lantern down grp.no. 2 IO5** free
* useable as call or as input and output ** useable as input or output

*** Grp.No. is the same like the number into the menu
Terminals Type
LS / LT / 200 / 500 Mini- Combicon 0,14 - 1,5 [mm²]
Setting of the MicroMatch connections:
1 3 1: Output
2: Earth
3: Input
2 4
4: +24VDC
28.11.2011 III / 19
MPK 40 / 400
Terminaldescription
Device MPK-menu * Default set-up Note
O1 6 (O) Hall lantern up grp.no.* [1]
O2 7 (O) Hall lantern down grp.no.* [1]
O3 8 (O) Hall lantern up grp.no.2
O4 9 (O) Hall lantern down grp.no.2
C1 1 (C) call up
C2 2 (C) call down
C3 3 (X), 4(O) free [2]
IO5 5 (U) free [3]
*terminaltype: (C) = call (input and output); (X) = call or input; (U) = input or output; (O) = output
[1]: * = current group-no. see menu setting

[2]: The input and output terminals are available in the menu, if the call terminal C3 is free.
[3]: Either input or output
Indicators:
• LED “5V“: is illuminated if the power supply for the logic devices is switched on.
• LED “Service“: flashes once on switch on and during actuation of the Delete switch.
A permanent flashing or a permanent illumination of that LED indicates, that the

module is defective and has to be exchanged.
Diameters:
X Y Height
79 mm 64 mm 15 mm
Scale drawing for the drill holes ETG B004-V3:

3,50
13,52 55,00 10,48
57,00
3,50
All data in [mm].
The supply voltage is protected against a voltage reversal.
The outputs are not short circuit and over load resistant.
III / 20 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.7 LON - Processor - module (LPK-A002)
C
D
E
XXX YY 0.00
LPK
TT.MM.JJ G_T_EE
LED
A
F
G
A RUN-LED
B Socket for programeprom
C Module type (FKF, IRP, ETG, IKL, ....)
D MPK-Type („4H“ = MPK 400)
E Program version
F Location: „G“ = Group number, „T“ = Door side, „EE“ = Floor
G Version date of the program
Notice: The functionality of the LON -Processor-module (LPK) is stored in the EPROM’s.
4.8 Construction and default set-up of the modules FKF / IRP / ETG / IKL
HK 24
LPK-A002
FKF
TT.MM.JJ G_T_EE
XXX YY 0.00
IRP
ETG M24
IKL
Module-type Mount. location Function Extension

FKF (car functions) Car Output doors 1 / 2, shaft Max 16 inp./outp.
copier, inspection, ... (EK 08 + EK 08)
IRP (car calls) Car Car calls, indicators, door Max 32 inp./outp.
open/close push button, ... (EK 08 + EK 24)
ETG (floors) Shaft Landing calls, Max 32 inp./outp.
hall lantern, .. (EK 08 + EK 24)
IKL (intelligent terminals) (any location) Any input-/output functions Max 32 inp./outp.
(EK 08 + EK 24)
28.11.2011 III / 21
MPK 40 / 400
Term. FKF IRP ETG M24 IKL

1 Correction top * Door open push button ..* Landing call up* **
2 Correction bottom * Door close push button ..* Landing call down* **
3 Pre limt switch top * ** ** **
4 Pre limt switch bottom * ** ** **
5 Inspect. operation* Display segment 1 * Display segment 1 * **
6 Inspection up * Display segment 2 * Display segment 2 * **
7 Inspection down * Display segment 3 * Display segment 3 * **
8 ** Display segment 4 * Display segment 4 * **
13 ** Arrow up * Hall lantern up * **
14 ** Arrow down * Hall lantern down * **
15 ** Car call fl. 1 * ** **
16 ** Car call fl. 2 * ** **
17 Photocell door 1 * Car call fl. 3 * ** **
18 Press. contact door 1 * Car call fl. 4 * ** **
19 Nudging. door 1 * Car call fl. 5 * ** **
20 Nudging signal door 1 * Car call fl. 6 * ** ** ...T: dep. on door side
21 Limit sw. open d. 1 * Car call fl. 7 * ** ** ...A: dep. on lift no.
22 Limit sw. close d. 1 * Car call fl. 8 * ** **
23 Door contr. open d. 1 * Car call fl. 9 * ** ** *: default set-up
24 Door contr. close d. 1 * Car call fl. 10 * ** ** **: free
III / 22 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.9 Car and car call-module (FKI)
X
ON
5V
D
RUN
1 2 3 4
B SYS
A
C E
01.01.01 *_0_00
FKI 4K 1.22
Y
G
OFF ON E
TERM
F
201
501
LS
LT
LT
ON
A To guarantee an error-free connection to the BST, the switches must be
set as stated above! 1 2 3 4
OFF ON
B Delete key: The function is not currently utilised.

C The program version and the date can be change!
D Displays:
LED 5V comes on: The power supply for the logic components is present.
LED RUN flashes: The module is ready for operation.
LED SYS comes on: The delete key has been actuated.
E Ribbon cable to interface-modules; for the connection between FKF and the interface-modules,
only the attached ribbon cable is to be used. Do not lengthenen the cable.
F Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
G Bus-termination, the jumper must be in the ON position!
* default set-up see chap. interface modules
Function: Door open/close, shaft copier, inspection, up to 8 car calls, door open/close push button, ...
Mount. location: car Interface modules: IM 40 – 01, - 03, - 10, -11, -12

201 +24V LT Connection, network, control
501 Ground LT Connection, network, control
LS Shielding, network, control
Diameters:
X Y Height* Height** * incl. plastic panel
28.11.2011 III / 23
MPK 40 / 400
4.10 Car and car call-module (FKP01)
A LED
C
D 5V
Y
RUN F
202
203
E
201
501
LS
LT
LT
A LPK module
B Programeprom
C Service-LED
D Displays:
LED 202 comes on: power supply term. 202 activated
E Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
F Slot for FKP-interface
Mount. location: car

Diameters:
III / 24 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.10.1 FKP-Interface 01
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKP. The terminals are useable
for line wire up to 2,5 mm².
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R9
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
R17
R18
R19
R20
R21
R22
R23
R24
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
R25
R26
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
D10
TA1
TA2
TE1
TE2
TE3
TE4
60A
60B
260
502
D9
60
63
71
72
203
203
203
203
203
203
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
Term. Copier signals

202 +24V
12A Impulse/Level up
12B Impulse/Level down
13A Correction top
13B Correction bottom
71 Zone-signal S71
72 Zone-signal S72
502 Ground
Term. Free programmable outputs Term. Car call

A1 door contr. open door 1 * R1 - 32 Car call 1 - 32 *
A2 door contr. close door 1 *
A3 door contr. open door 2 *
A4 door contr. close door 2 *
A5 Shutdown light off *
A6 Fan output *
A7 Free *
A8 Free *
* Default set-up FKP * Default set-up FKP
28.11.2011 III / 25
MPK 40 / 400
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Display segment

E1 Photocell door 1 * D1 Display segment 1 *
E2 Press. contact door 1 * D2 Display segment 2 *
E3 Open limit switch door 1 * D3 Display segment 3 *
E4 Close limit switch door 1 * D4 Display segment 4 *
Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... Term. Travel direction, free progr. term.
60 Inspection D9 Arrow-up *
60A Inspection travel up D10 Arrow-down *
60B Inspection travel down TA1 Overload *
63 Overload (input) TA2 Free *
260 +24V (Inspection) TE1 Door open push button door 1 *
502 Ground TE2 Door close push button door 1 *
71 bridged int. with term. 71 (only clamping point!) TE3 Landing control off *
72 bridged int. with term. 72 (only clamping point!) TE4 Free *
* Default set-up FKP
Term. Power supply

202 … +24V
502 … Ground
203 … +24V (R9 – R32)
III / 26 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.10.2 FKP-Interface 02
The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKP. The terminals are useable
for line wire up to 2,5 mm². The connections ST1 / ST2 are used for cabin-panel that can be plugged.
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
R25
R26
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
ANO
ALQ
FK1
FK2
FK3
FK4
FK5
FK6
FK7
FK8
60A
60B
260
502
AC
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
60
63
71
72
NL+
R21
R22
R23
R24
KL1
KL2
202
202
202
202
202
202
502
502
502
502
502
502
203
203
203
203
NL-
R D R ST3 10
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
TE1 TE2 TE3 TE4 TA1 TA2
ST1 34 ST2 34 B
1 1
A Measuring point for the signals of ribbon cable ST1/ST2 without terminal
B Connection to module W40-IF

202 +24V
13A Correction top
71 Zone-signal S71
72 Zone-signal S72
502 Ground
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Free programmable outputs

E1 Photocell door 1 * A1 Door contr. open door 1 *
E2 Press. contact door 1 * A2 Door contr. close door 1 *
E3 Open limit switch door 1 * A3 Door contr. open door 2 *
E4 Close limit switch door 1 * A4 Door contr. close door 2 *
E5 Photocell door 2 * A5 Shutdown light off *
E6 Press. contact door 2 * A6 Fan output *
E7 Open limit switch door 2 * A7 Free *
E8 Close limit switch door 2 * A8 Free *
* Default set-up * Default set-up
Term. Calls
R25 – Car calls floor 25 – 31*
R31
* Default set-up
28.11.2011 III / 27
MPK 40 / 400
Term. Inspection, … Term. Emerg. call / Alarm

60 Inspection T1 Phone connection T1
60A Inspection travel up T2 Phone connection T2
60B Inspection travel down T3 Phone connection T3
63 Overload (input) T4 Phone connection T4
260 +24V (Inspection) T5 Phone connection T5
502 Ground ALQ Alarm acknowledgement
71 Zone signal S71 ANO Alarm push button
72 Zone signal S72 AC Alarm push button
Term. Free terminals, power supply

FK1 – (for free use, no programmable,
FK8 see ribbon cable connection ST2)
Term. Power supply, emerg. light Term. Free terminals, power supply
202 + 24V KL1 (for free use, no programmable)
202 KL2 (for free use, no programmable)
202 502 Ground
202 502
202 502
202 502
NL+ Emerg. light + 502
NL- Emerg. light - 502
Term. Power supply, calls

203 +24V
R21 – Car calls floor 21 – 24 *
R24
* Default set-up
Pin Ribbon cable connection ST1 Pin Ribbon cable connection ST1
1 502 / Ground 18 D7 / Display segment 7 *
2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow - up *
3 Car call 1 * 20 D10 / Arrow – down *
4 Car call 2 * 21 TA1 / Overload (output)*
5 Car call 3 * 22 TE3 / Landing control off *
6 Car call 4 * 23 Phone connection T1
10 TE1 / door open push button 1 * 27 Phone connection T5
11 TE2 / door close push button 1 * 28 ALQ / Alarm acknowledgement
12 D1 / Display segment 1 * 29 ANO / Alarm push button
13 D2 / Display segment 2 * 30 AC / Alarm push button
14 D3 / Display segment 3 * 31 NL+ / emerg. light +
15 D4 / Display segment 4 * 32 NL- / emerg. light -
16 D5 / Display segment 5 * 33 202 / +24V
17 D6 / Display segment 6 * 34 502 / Ground
* Default set-up
III / 28 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
1 500 / Ground 18 Car call 21 *
2 203 / +24V 19 Car call 22 *
3 Car call 8 * 20 Car call 23 *
4 Car call 9 * 21 TA2 / free *
5 Car call 10 * 22 D8 / Display segment 8 *
6 Car call 11 * 23 FK1
9 Car call 14 * 26 KL1
10 TE4 / free * 27 KL2
11 Car call 24 * 28 FK4
12 Car call 15 * 29 FK5
13 Car call 16 * 30 FK6
14 Car call 17 * 31 FK7
15 Car call 18 * 32 FK8
16 Car call 19 * 33 203 / +24V
17 Car call 20 * 34 500 / Ground
* Default set-up
Pin ST3 Pin ST3

1 Zone signal S71 6 Phone connection T1
3 NL+ / emerg. light + 8 Phone connection T3
4 NL- / emerg. light- 9 Phone connection T4
5 AC / Alarm push button 10 Phone connection T5
28.11.2011 III / 29
MPK 40 / 400
4.11 Car and car call-module (FKP02)
NL+
C10
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
KL1
KL2
C11
NL-
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
A
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
60A
60B
202
202
202
202
260
502
C
60
71
72
I9
Service 203
203
203
203
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
5V
B RUN
Y
202
203
ALQ
ALO
FK1
FK2
FK3
FK4
FK5
FK6
FK7
FK8
D10
TE1
TE2
TE3
TE4
TA1
TA2
502
502
502
502
AC
D9
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
D
ST1 ST2
A A
E ST3
201
501
LS
LT
LT
B B
A Programeprom as of 1.36-Version
B Displays:
LED Service
C Terminals for line wire up to 2,5 mm²
D Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
E Ribon cable connection
Mount. location: car
Term. Power supply Term. Netzwork interface

201 +24V LT Connection, netzwork, control
501 Ground LT Connection, netzwork, control
LS Shielding, netzwork, control
Diameters:
X Y Height* Height** *incl. plastic panel
183 mm 126 mm 43 mm 53 mm **incl. plastic panel and fixing bracket for DIN-rail mounting
III / 30 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
Term. Copier signals Term. Power supply

202 +24V 202 … +24V (C1 – C8)
12A Impulse/Level up 502 … Ground
12B Impulse/Level down 203 … +24V (C9 – C32)
13A Correction top
71 Zone-signal S71
72 Zone-signal S72
502 Ground

I1 Photocell door 1 * O1 Door contr. open door 1 *
I2 Press. contact door 1 * O2 Door contr. close door 1 *
I3 Open limit switch door 1 * O3 Door contr. open door 2 *
I4 Close limit switch door 1 * O4 Door contr. close door 2 *
I5 Photocell door 2 * O5 Shutdown light off *
I6 Press. contact door 2 * O6 Fan output *
I7 Open limit switch door 2 * O7 Free *
I8 Close limit switch door 2 * O8 Free *
Term. Car call

C1 - Car call 1 – 32*
C32
* Default set-up FKP
Term. Inspection, ... Term. Emerg. call / Alarm

I9 Free T4 Phone connection T4
Term. Display segment Term. Fahrtrichtung, frei belegb. Klem.

D1 Display segment 1 * D9 Arrow-up *
D2 Display segment 2 * D10 Arrow-down *
D3 Display segment 3 * TA1 Overload *
D4 Display segment 4 * TA2 Free *
D5 Display segment 5 * TE1 Door open push button door 1 *
D6 Display segment 6 * TE2 Door close push button door 1 *
D7 Display segment 7 * TE3 Landing control off *
D8 Display segment 8 * TE4 Fan button*
Term. Free terminals, power supply

FK1 – (for free use, no programmable,
FK8 see ribbon cable connection ST2 A/B)
28.11.2011 III / 31
MPK 40 / 400
Pin Ribbon cable connection ST1A und ST1B Pin Ribbon cable connection ST1A und ST1B
2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow - up *
3 Car call 1 * 20 D10 / Arrow – down *
4 Car call 2 * 21 TA1 / Overload (output)*
5 Car call 3 * 22 TE3 / Landing control off *
Pin Flachbandkabelanschluss ST2A und ST2B Pin Flachbandkabelanschluss ST2A und ST2B
1 500 / Ground 18 Car call 21 *
2 203 / +24V 19 Car call 22 *
3 Car call 8 * 20 Car call 23 *
4 Car call 9 * 21 TA2 / free *
5 Car call 10 * 22 D8 / Display segment 8 *
9 Car call 14 * 26 KL1
10 TE4 / free * 27 KL2
11 Car call 24 * 28 FK4
12 Car call 15 * 29 FK5
13 Car call 16 * 30 FK6
14 Car call 17 * 31 FK7
15 Car call 18 * 32 FK8
16 Car call 19 * 33 203 / +24V
17 Car call 20 * 34 500 / Ground
Pin ST3 Pin ST3

III / 32 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.12 Car module FKF 40
X
ON 5V
D
RUN
1 2 3 4
B SYS
A
E
FKF 4D 1.04
04.01.00 C
G
Y
F TERM E
ON
OFF
201
501
LS
LT
LT
A To guarantee an error-free connection to the BST 40, the switches must

be set as stated above!
B Delete key: The function is not currently utilised.
C The program version and the date can be change!
D Displays:
E Ribbon cable to interface-modules; for the connection between FKF and the interface-modules,
only the attached ribbon cable is to be used. Do not lengthen the cable.
F Bus-termination, the jumper must be in the ON position!
G Diagnostic socket, connection for LON-Hand terminal (LHT4)
* default set-up see chap. interface modules
Function: Door open/close, shaft copier, inspection, car calls, door open/close push button, ...
Mount. location: car Interface modules: IM 40 – 01, - 03, - 10, -11, -12

Diameters:
28.11.2011 III / 33
MPK 40 / 400
4.13 Hall lantern module WFA 40
500
200
LS
LT
LT
ON
5V
RUN
1 2 3 4
SYS C
A
B
WFA 4D 1.00
Y
01.01.99
D
21w
22w
23w
24w
25w
26w
27w
28w
21u
22u
23u
24u
25u
26u
27u
28u
ON
A To guarantee an error-free connection to the BST 40, the switches must be
set as stated above! 1 2 3 4
OFF ON
B Displays:
C Delete key: The function is not currently utilised.
D The program version and the date can be changed!

Term. Hall lantern up Term. Hall lantern down

21w Floor 1 21u Floor 1
III / 34 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
Term. Outputs
21-28 Output: 24 V / max. 280 mA
The outputs are short circuit and over load resistant.
Diameters:
28.11.2011 III / 35
MPK 40 / 400
4.14 Interface module IM 40 – 01 / 1,5 qmm

The assembly is used to connect signals (copying, internal calls, ....) to the FKF 40 and FKI. The terminals
are useable for line wire up to 1,5 mm².
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
B
24V
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
Y
TA1
TA2
D10
60A
60B
260
202
502
502
202
202
502
502
D9
60
63
A TE1
TE2
TE3
TE4
202
202
502
502
71
72
A Ribbon cable connection to module FKF 40 / FKI

B LED 24V comes on: The working voltage is present.

202 +24V
12A Impulse/Level Up
12B Impulse/Level Down
13A Correction top
71 Zone-signal S71
72 Zone-signal S72
502 Ground

A1 Door contr. open door 1 * R1 Car call 1
A2 Door contr. close door 1 * R2 Car call 2
A3 Door contr. open door 2 * R3 Car call 3
A4 Door contr. close door 2 * R4 Car call 4
A5 Shutdown light off * R5 Car call 5
A6 Fan output * R6 Car call 6
A7 free * R7 Car call 7
A8 free * R8 Car call 8
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
III / 36 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400

* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... Term. Travel direction, Power supply,...
60 Inspection D9 Arrow-up **
60A Inspection travel up D10 Arrow-down **
260 +24V (Inspection) 202 +24V
202 +24V 202 +24V
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed; * Def. set-up FKI and FKF 40
Term. Zone Term. Free programmable inputs, Power supply

71 bridged int. with term. S71 (only clamping point!) TE1 Door open push button door 1 *
72 bridged int. with term. S72 (only clamping point!) TE2 Door close push button door 1 *
TE3 Landing control off *
TE4 Fan push button* (FKI : set up “free”)
202 +24V
202 +24V
502 Ground
502 Ground
Diameters:
28.11.2011 III / 37
MPK 40 / 400

are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm².
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
B
24V
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
Y
TA1
TA2
TE1
TE2
TE3
TE4
D10
60A
60B
260
502
D9
60
63
71
72
A
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502


202 +24V
13A Correction top
71 Zone-signal S71
72 Zone-signal S72
502 Ground

A1 door contr. open door 1 * R1 Car call 1 **
A2 door contr. close door 1 * R2 Car call 2 **
A3 door contr. open door 2 * R3 Car call 3 **
A4 door contr. close door 2 * R4 Car call 4 **
A5 Shutdown light off * R5 Car call 5 **
A6 Fan output * R6 Car call 6 **
A7 Free * R7 Car call 7 **
A8 Free * R8 Car call 8 **
* Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI ** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed
III / 38 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400

Term. Inspection, Power supply, .... Term. Travel direction, free progr. term.
60 Inspection D9 Arrow-up **
60A Inspection travel up D10 Arrow-down **
260 +24V (Inspection) TE1 Door open push button door 1 *
502 Ground TE2 Door close push button door 1 *
71 bridged int. with term. S71 (only clamping point!) TE3 Landing control off *
72 bridged int. with term. S72 (only clamping point!) TE4 Fan push button* (FKI : set up “free”)
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed; * Def. set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Term. Power supply Term. Power supply

202 +24V 502 Ground
202 +24V 502 Ground
202 +24V 502 Ground
202 +24V 502 Ground
202 +24V 502 Ground
202 +24V 502 Ground
202 +24V 502 Ground
202 +24V 502 Ground
Diameters:
28.11.2011 III / 39
MPK 40 / 400

are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm². The connections ST1 / ST2 are used for cabin-panel that can be
plugged. Further the signals D8 and call 8 are available (see modules IM 40 –10 / ...).
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
24V
ST3 10
B
1 C
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A
ANO
ALQ
60A
60B
260
502
AC
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
60
63
71
72
Y
NL+
KL1
KL2
202
202
202
202
202
202
502
502
502
502
502
502
NL-
A D
ST2 34
R D
1 D9
2 D10
1 3 TA1
ST1 34 4 TA2
5 TE1
6 TE2
1 7 TE3
8 TE4

C Connection to module W40-IF
D Measuring point for the signals of ribbon cable ST1/ST2 (car call panel).

202 +24V
13A Correction top
71 Zone-signal S71
72 Zone-signal S72
502 Ground

III / 40 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
Term. Inspection, , .... Term. Emerg. call / Alarm

Term. Power supply, emerg. light Term. Free terminal, power supply
202 + 24V KL1 (free, not programable)
202 KL2 (free, not programable)
202 502 Ground
202 502
202 502
202 502
NL+ Emerg. light + 502
NL- Emerg. light - 502
2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow - up **
3 Car call 1 ** 20 D10 / Arrow – down **
4 Car call 2 ** 21 TA1 / Overload (output)*
5 Car call 3 ** 22 TE3 / Landing control off *
6 Car call 4 ** 23 Phone connection T1
1 502 / Ground 25 E8
2 202 / +24V 26 KL1
3 Car call 8 ** 27 KL2
4-9 n. c. 28 A8
10 TE4 29 A6
11-20 n. c. 30 A7
21 TA2 31-32 n. c.
23 E6 34 502 / Ground
24 E7
** Default set-up FKI; set up FKF 40 fixed; * default set up FKF 40 and FKI
28.11.2011 III / 41
MPK 40 / 400
Pin ST3 Pin ST3

Diameters:
X Y Höhe* Höhe** *incl. plastic panel

plugged.
X
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
60A
60B
260
202
502
502
60
63
24V
A B
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Y
ANO
ALQ
NL+
202
202
502
502
NL-
AC
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
71
72
A
34
ST2
1
34
ST1
1

Term. Copier signals Term. Inspection, Power supply, ....

202 +24V 60 Inspection
12A Impulse/Level up 60A Inspection travel up
12B Impulse/Level down 60B Inspection travel down
13A Correction top 63 Overload (input)
13B Correction bottom 260 +24V (Inspection)
71 Zone-signal S71 202 +24V
72 Zone-signal S72 502 Ground
III / 42 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400

Term. Remote alarm / Alarm Term. Zone, Emergency light

T1 Phone connection T1 71 bridged int. with term. S71 (only clamping point!)
T2 Phone connection T2 72 bridged int. with term. S72 (only clamping point!)
T3 Phone connection T3 NL+ Emergency light +
T4 Phone connection T4 NL- Emergency light -
T5 Phone connection T5
ALQ Alarm acknowledgement
ANO Alarm push button
AC Alarm push button
Pin Ribbon cable ST1 / ST2 Pin Ribbon cable ST1 / ST2
2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow – up **
10 TE1 / door open push button door 1* 27 Phone connection T5
11 TE2 / door close push button door 1* 28 ALQ / Alarm acknowledgement
14 D3 / Display segment 3 * 31 NL+ / Emergency light +
15 D4 / Display segment 4 * 32 NL- / Emergency light -
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKF 40 and FKI
Diameters:
28.11.2011 III / 43
MPK 40 / 400

plugged.
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
24V
ST3 10
B
1 C
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A
ANO
ALQ
60A
60B
260
502
AC
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
60
63
71
72
Y
NL+
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
NL-
A
ST2 34
D
R D
1 D9
1 2 D10
ST1 34 3
4 TA1
5 TE1
6 TE2
1 7 TE3

C Ribbon cable connection to module W 40-IF
D Messurepoints for the signals of ST1/ST2

202 +24V
13A Correction top
71 Zone-signal S71
72 Zone-signal S72
502 Ground

III / 44 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
Term. Inspection, Zone, ... Term. Remote alarm / Alarm

71 Zone-signal S71 ANO Alarm push button
72 Zone-signal S72 AC Alarm push button
Term. Power supply, Emergency light Term. Emergency light, Power supply
202 + 24V NL- Emergency light -
202 502 Ground
202 502
202 502
202 502
202 502
202 502
NL+ Emergency light + 502
Pin Ribbon cable ST1 / ST2 Pin Ribbon cable ST1 / ST2
2 202 / +24V 19 D9 / Arrow – up **
10 TE1 / door open push button door 1 * 27 Phone connection T5
11 TE2 / door close push button door 1 * 28 ALQ / Alarm acknowledgement
14 D3 / Display segment 3 * 31 NL+ / Emergency light +
15 D4 / Display segment 4 * 32 NL- / Emergency light -
Pin ST3 Pin ST3

1 Zonesignal S71 6 Phone connection T1
3 NL+ / Emergency light + 8 Phone connection T3
4 NL- / Emergency light - 9 Phone connection T4
Diameters:
28.11.2011 III / 45
MPK 40 / 400

are useable for line wire up to 1,5 mm². You can partially connect the signals via Ultrex connectors.
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
ULTREX:
71
72
B
24V
1 2 3
R1 R2
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A R3 R4
DIS1:
R5 R6
502
R7 R8 D1
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
TE1 TE2 .
.
Y
TE3 TE4 .
TA1
60A
60B
260
202
502
502
60
63
TA2 D10
DIS1
202
NL
A
AL
DIS2:
ANO
ALQ
NL+
NL-
1 3 5 7 9
AC
D0
71
72
DIS2
2 4 6 8 10

C Set-up of the ULTREX-terminals:
PIN R1-TA2 AL NL
1 Ground ALQ (n.c.)
2 Outp./inp. ANO NL+
3 + 24V AC NL-
Term. Copier signals Term. Free programmable outputs

202 +24V A1 Door contr. open door 1 *
12A Impulse/Level up A2 Door contr. close door 1 *
12B Impulse/Level down A3 Door contr. open door 2 *
13A Correction top A4 Door contr. close door 2 *
13B Correction bottom A5 Shutdown light off *
71 Zone-signal S71 A6 Fan output *
72 Zone-signal S72 A7 Free *
502 Ground A8 Free *
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Inspection, Power supply, ....

E1 Photocell door 1 * 60 Inspection
E2 Press. contact door 1 * 60A Inspection travel up
E3 Open limit switch door 1 * 60B Inspection travel down
E4 Close limit switch door 1 * 63 Overload (input)
E5 Photocell door 2 * 260 +24V (Inspection)
E6 Press. contact door 2 * 202 +24V
E7 Open limit switch door 2 * 502 Ground
E8 Close limit switch door 2 * 502 Ground
III / 46 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
Term. Alarm, ...

ALQ Alarm acknowledgement
ANO Alarm push button
AC Alarm push button
NL+ Emergency light +
NL- Emergency light -
D0 bridged int. with Pin10 DIS2 (only clamping point!)
71 bridged int. with term. S71 (only clamping point!)
72 bridged int. with term. S72 (only clamping point!)
Ultrex Car call Ultrex Free progr. inputs, Power supply

R1 Car call 1 ** TE1 Door open push button door 1 *
R2 Car call 2 ** TE2 Door close push button door 1 *
R3 Car call 3 ** TE3 Landing control off *
R4 Car call 4 ** TE4 Fan push button * (FKI: set up “Free”)
R5 Car call 5 ** TA1 Overload *
R6 Car call 6 ** TA2 Free *
R7 Car call 7 ** NL Emergency light
R8 Car call 8 ** AL Alarm
Ultrex DIS1 Micro- DIS2 (for indicator comp. W. Schäfer)

Match
502 Power supply ground 1 202 / Power supply +24V (1,5 A)
D1 Display segment 1 * 2 D1 / Address 0
D6 Display segment 6 * 7 D9 / Arrow-up **
D7 Display segment 7 * 8 D10 / Arrow-down **
D8 Display segment 8 * 9 502 / Power supply ground
D9 Arrow-up ** 10 Bridged int. with term. D0 / signal „travel“
D10 Arrow-down **
202 Power supply +24V (1,5 A)
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKI and FKF40
Diameters:
28.11.2011 III / 47
MPK 40 / 400

are useable for line wire up to 2,5 mm². You can partially connect the signals via Micro-Match connectors.
12A
12B
13A
13B
202
502
71
72
R1 R2 R3 12
11
R4 R5 R6
A1 B C
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A R7 R8
4
TE1 TE2 TA1 3
2 2
1 1
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
NL1 DS
Y
AL1
ANO
ALQ
TE3
TE4
TA2
NL+
60A
60B
260
502
NL-
AC
60
63
71
72
A
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
202
502
502
502
502
502
502
502
502

C System of the Micro-Match-terminals
Term. Copier signals Term. Free programmable outputs

202 +24V A1 Door contr. open door 1 *
12A Impulse/Level up A2 Door contr. close door 1 *
12B Impulse/Level down A3 Door contr. open door 2 *
13A Correction top A4 Door contr. close door 2 *
13B Correction bottom A5 Shutdown light off *
71 Zone-signal S71 A6 Fan output *
72 Zone-signal S72 A7 Free *
502 Ground A8 Free *
III / 48 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
Term. Free programmable inputs Term. Inspection, Power supply, ....

E1 Photocell door 1 * 60 Inspection
E2 Press. contact door 1 * 60A Inspection travel up
E3 Open limit switch door 1 * 60B Inspection travel down
E4 Close limit switch door 1 * 63 Overload (input)
E5 Photocell door 2 * 260 +24V (Inspection)
E6 Press. contact door 2 * 502 Ground
E7 Open limit switch door 2 * 71 Zone-signal S71
E8 Close limit switch door 2 * 72 Zone-signal S72
Term. Power supply Term. Power supply

202 + 24V 502 Ground
202 502
202 502
202 502
202 502
202 502
202 502
202 502
Micro- Car call Micro- Free programmable inputs, Power supply

Match Match
R1 Car call 1 ** TE1 Door open push button door 1 *
R2 Car call 2 ** TE2 Door close push button door 1 *
R3 Car call 3 ** TA1 Overload *
R4 Car call 4 ** NL1 Emergency light
R5 Car call 5 ** AL1 Alarm
R6 Car call 6 **
R7 Car call 7 **
R8 Car call 8 **
Micro- DS Micro- DS
Match Match
1 Power supply +24V (1,5 A) 7 Display segment 4 (A4) *
2 Arrow-down ** 8 Display segment 5 (A3) *
3 Arrow-up ** 9 Display segment 6 (A2) *
4 Display segment 1 (A7) * 10 Display segment 7 (A1) *
5 Display segment 2 (A6) * 11 Display segment 8 (A0) *
6 Display segment 3 (A5) * 12 Power supply ground
** Default set-up FKI; FKF 40 set-up fixed * Default set-up FKI and FKF40
Diameters:
28.11.2011 III / 49
MPK 40 / 400
4.21 Interface module IM 40 - V.24

The assembly expands the BST 40 / 400 by a V.24 interface (terminals: TDA, 0VA, RDA). Therefore, a
printer can be connected or a remote data transmission connection is possible.
RDA
TDA
0VA
A
J1
J2
RDA
TDA
0VA
J3
E1
E2
E3
B
C
A
B
BST 40
BST 400
A Interface module IM 40 – V.24 (serial interface)

B Fitted with soldering side upwards
C Socket for IM 40 – V.24
III / 50 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
4.22 Interface module W 40 – IF 002

The assembly is used to connect signals of the trailer cable with terminals in the inspection box.
FR7 T5 72
FR6 T4 71
L13 FR5 T3 60C
Y
L12 FR4 T2 63
FR3 T1 LT-
L11
FR2 103 LT+
N FR1 103 201
FR1 102 501
101 102 1
10 B
N4
N4
N4
N4
N4
L7
L7
L8
L8
L5
L5
L5
L5
L5
A Connections to trailer cable

B Connections to module IM 40 – 10 / 2,5 qmm
Term. Doormotor
L13 Doormotor/doorcontroller
L12 Doormotor
L11 Doormotor
N N
Term. Term.
FR7 Free T5 Phone connection T5
FR2 Free 103 Emergency call
FR1 Free 103 Emergency call
FR1 Free 102 Emergency light -
101 Emergency light + 102 Emergency light -
Term.
72 Zonesignal S71
71 Zonesignal S72
FR8 Free
63 Free
LT- Network, connection
LT+ Network, connection
201 + 24V
501 0V (ground)
28.11.2011 III / 51
MPK 40 / 400
Pin Ribbon cable connection Pin Ribbon cable connection

3 NL+ / emergency light + 8 Phone connection T3
4 NL- / emergency light - 9 Phone connection T4
5 AC / alarm push button 10 Phone connection T5
Term.
L7 Push button shaftlight
L7
L8 Push button shaftlight
L8
Term. Term.
N4 N (Cabin light) L5 Cabin light
N4 L5
N4 L5
N4 L5
N4 L5
Diameters:
and ribbon cable to trailer cable
III / 52 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
5 Technical data
5.1 Power supply MPK
MPK 40 MPK 400

UInput 24 [VDC] 24 [VDC]
IInput [A] 3,15 3,15
Voltage tolerance of the power supply: + 10% until -20%
5.2 Power supply control (24 VDC)
Type MPK 40 MPK 400

min. / typ. / max. min. / typ. / max.
Term. 200 UOutput [VDC] 19,2 / 24 / 28
Term. 200 IOutput [A] 1 1
Term. 201 UOutput [VDC] 19,2 / 24 / 28
Term. 201 IOutput [A] 1,5 1,5
Term. 207 UOutput [VDC] 19,2 / 24 / 28 -
Term. 207 IOutput [A] 1,5 -
Main- and extension modules (HK 24 / EK 08 / EK 24):

Type min. / typ. / max.
Term. 210 UOutput [VDC] 19,2 / 24 / 28
Term. 210 IOutput [mA] 250
The outputs are short circuit and over load resistant.
5.3 Drawing of current (modules)

Type [mA] Type [mA]
Extension module EM 16C 55 – max. 2000 FKI 100 - 1500
Mainmodule (HK 24) 55 – 2000 FKF 40 55 – 1500
Extension modules (EK24 / 08) 25 – 2000 WFA 40 55 – 800
ETG B004-V2 30 – 1600 FKP 120- 3000
ETG B004-V3 30 – 2000
5.4 Monitoring PTC
Ron - off [K ] Ron – off [K ] I [mA]

1,75 / 1,8 / 1,85 2,25 / 2,3 / 2,35 0,65
28.11.2011 III / 53
MPK 40 / 400
5.5 Inputs
Type MPK 40 MPK 400

Standard and call Uoff [VDC] 0/0/5
Standard and call Ioff [mA] 0/0/2
Standard and call Uon [VDC] 15 / 24 / 28
Standard and call Ion [mA] -/7/-
BST terminal E1 Ion [mA] - / 12 (V4)*; 40 (V5)* / - - / 17 (V3)*; 40 (V4)*; 40 (V5)* / -
BST terminal E2 Ion [mA] - / 12 (V4)*; 29 (V5)* / - - / 13 (V3)*; 29 (V4)*, 40 (V5)* / -
BST terminal E3 Ion [mA] -/7/- - / 5 (V3)*; 5 (V4)*, 40 (V5)* / -
Pol. saf. cir. 230 VAC Uoff [VAC] 0 / 0 / 120
Pol. saf. cir. 230 VAC Ioff [mA] 0 / 0 / 1,6
Pol. saf. cir. 230 VAC Uon [VAC] 175 / 230 / -
Pol. saf. cir. 230 VAC Ion [mA] - / 3,4 / -
MPK 400: ETG B004-V3 standard and calls Ion : 2 mA

* the input curent is dependent of the moudle version (V). You find the version number on the lowest circuit board on the right side.
(BST 400: E1_4H V..., BST40: 4ZGK01 V...).
5.6 Outputs
Type (min. / typ. / max.)

Standard / calls Uoutput [VDC] 15 / 24 / 28
Type BST 40 BST 400 HK FKF 40 FKI/FKP WFA 40

Standard Ioutput [mA] 100 280 - 280 280 250
Calls Ioutput [mA] 100 280 250 280 280 -
Type EM 16C ETG B004-V2 ETG B004-V3

Standard Ioutput [mA] 280 100
Calls Ioutput [mA] 280 100 100
ETG B004-V2: Ioutput A 2, A 3: 100 mA; A 5, A 6, A 7, A 8: 250 mA
The outputs are short circuit and over load resistant (exception: ETG B004-V3).
III / 54 28.11.2011
MPK 40 / 400
6 Overview of the modules in the MPK-Systems
MPK
Module Function 40 400
BSTV 40 Relay module
BSTV Relay module
EM 16C Extension inputs/outputs BST 400
ETG B004-V2 Landing calls / floor
ETG B004-V3 Landing calls / floor
ETG M24 Landing calls / floor
IKL M24 Any input-/output functions
IRP M24 Car call, door
FKF M24 Copier, inspection, door
FKF 40 Copier, inspection, door, car calls
FKI Copier, inspection, door, car calls
FKP Copier, inspection, door, car calls
WFA 40 Hall lantern
IM 40 – 01 / 1,5 Interface module FKF 40 / FKI
IM 40 – V.24 Interface module (serial port)
W 40 – IF 002 Interface module trailer cable
available; - not available
MPK 400: You can use additionally the modules of the Kollmorgen Shaftbus System (KSB). For more
information read the documentation <<Kollmorgen Shaftbus (KSB) / Systemdocumentation>>.
28.11.2011 III / 55
MPK 400
Commissioning the Digital Selector (DSC)

KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 14.12.2007 / DO_DS4H_GB

MPK 400
Contents
1 Short introduction .........................................................................................................3
2 Commissioning .............................................................................................................5
2.1 Checking the connections of the signals............................................................................. 5
2.2 Checking the basic settings................................................................................................. 5
2.3 Entering the travel height..................................................................................................... 5
2.4 Setting the speed of the learning travel ............................................................................... 5
2.5 Starting the learning travel................................................................................................... 6
2.6 Setting the cut-off points for the various speeds ................................................................ 6
2.6.1 Cut-off point <<v-fast>> ................................................................................................... 7
2.6.2 Cut-off point <<v-intermediate>> ...................................................................................... 8
2.6.3 Cut-off point <<v-slow>>.................................................................................................. 8
2.6.4 Direct entry (reference point output) ................................................................................. 9
2.7 Setting the min. distance for starting with <<v-fast>> or <<v-intermediate>> .................... 9
2.8 Measuring the floor level difference................................................................................... 10
2.9 Enter the floor level difference........................................................................................... 11
2.10 Correction the floor level values........................................................................................ 11
2.11 Setting the relevelling ranges............................................................................................ 12
2.12 Activating the relevelling ................................................................................................... 13
2.13 Cecklists of the Commissioning........................................................................................ 13
2.13.1 Checklist for learning travels ........................................................................................ 13
2.13.2 Checklist for correcting floor level values ...................................................................... 15
2.13.3 Checklist for releveling settings .................................................................................... 16
3 Diagnostic....................................................................................................................16
3.1 Function <<Stop position>>............................................................................................... 16
3.2 Function <<Resolution>>................................................................................................... 16
3.3 Function <<Valid learn. travel>>, <<Act. learning travel>>................................................ 17
4 Level offset supervise.................................................................................................17
4.1 Function <<level offset tolerance>>................................................................................... 17
4.2 Function <<level offset limit>>........................................................................................... 17
4.3 Function <<level offset handling>>.................................................................................... 17
5 Appendix .....................................................................................................................18
5.1 Position graph .................................................................................................................... 18
5.2 Configuration of the Digital Selector (DSC) ....................................................................... 19
5.3 DSC connection types........................................................................................................ 20
5.4 Overview of the DSC module ............................................................................................. 21
5.5 Description of the DSC LED´s............................................................................................ 21
5.6 Selecting the incremental encoder and speed governor................................................... 22
5.7 Notes on signal routing...................................................................................................... 22
IV / 2 14.12.2007
MPK 400
1 Short introduction
1 Check this signal connections. ( Chapt. 2.1)
shaft copier signals

* only by <<safety circuit>>
13 A
13 B
15 A**
15 B**
S 71
S 72*
** <<pre-limit switch>> only by “short
82 83 84 E3 E2 A1* distances” at top- / bottom- level
Terminals (control)
2 Check this basic settings. ( Chapt. 2.2)
Basic setting Basic setting Basic setting

Lift Lift Lift
No. of stops Type of selector Type of drive
… Digital selector …
3 Set the travel height. ( Chapt. 2.3)
Settings
Digital selector
Travel height
4 Confirm the sp. of the learning travel. ( Chapt. 2.4)
Settings
Digital selector
Learning travel speed
…
5 Start the learning travel. ( Chapt. 2.5)
Settings
Digital selector
Learning activated
6 Set the cut off points for speeds (Upward-and downward- direction) ( Chapt. 2.6)
Settings Settings Settings

Digital selector Digital selector Digital selector
v- ... off up v- ... off up* v-0 off up
14.12.2007 IV / 3
MPK 400
7 Set the minimum distances for starting with <<V-fast>> and <<V-intermediate>>
( Chapt. 2.7)
Settings Settings * These settings are

necessary, if the shaft
Digital selector Digital selector
contens "short
Start speed v-... from * Start speed v-... from * distances".
8 Drive to each floor in the upward and downward direction. Mearsure the floor level
deviation. (Take care that the relevelling is not active!) ( Chapt. 2.8)
9 Enter the floor level difference (Upward-and downward- direction). ( Chapt. 2.9)
Settings Settings
Floor level difference Floor level difference
Lev. 1 down … mm Lev. … down … mm
10 Start the correction of the floor level values. ( Chapt. 2.10)
Settings
Digital selector
Floor level correction
11 Drive to each floor in the upward and downward direction and check the floor level .
Repeat the steps 8 - 10 if necessary.
12 Set the relevelling ranges (Upward-and downward- direction) ( Chapt. 2.11)
Settings Settings
Relevelling Relevelling
Relevelling up on Relevelling up off
Vs. fl. Lev. … mm Vs. fl. Lev. … mm
13 Set the function to <<Yes>>. ( Chapt. 2.12)
Settings
Relevelling
Active
YES
IV / 4 14.12.2007
MPK 400
2 Commissioning
Please note that the DSC already contains some data as a result of works tests (e.g. travel height used
for simulation). These values are not default values for the DCS and they must be adjusted to suit the
conditions at the site in question.
Switch off the relevelling function for the entire duration of the commissioning procedure
(Menu: <<Settings / Relevelling / active / NO>>).
2.1 Checking the connections of the signals

<<correction->> switches 13A and 13B installed und connected
short distance at the bottom floor: <<pre-limit->> switch (15B) installed and connected
short distance at the top floor: <<pre-limit->> switch (15A) installed and connected
zone switch S71 or S71 & S72 installed and connected (see chapter <<appendix / DSC connection
types>> and electrical drawings)
outputs A/B of the encoder connected (see chapter <<appendix / DSC connection types>> and
electrical drawings)
2.2 Checking the basic settings

Before the values for the incremental DSC are set, the configuration of the lift system must be checked
using the following basic settings. Changes made under these menu items only become effective after a
RESET. Furthermore, the drive values in the main menu <<Settings>> must be matched carefully as they
decisively influence the running characteristics.
Check the position of the <<correction->> switches and, when “short floor distance” is indicated at the
top/bottom flloors, check also the position of the <<pre-limit->> switches as these switches are used to
switch off fast speed during the learning travel. Where <<correction->> and <<pre-limit->> switch
signals have been reversed or are missing, check that the lift car moves beyond the terminal floors at
the pre-set learning travel speed or at the <<v-slow>> speed!
2.3 Entering the travel height

The travel height is calculated from to the distance between the sill on the lowest floor and the sill on the
highest floor.
The travel height should be calculated (in cm) as precisely as possible, as it is used as a basis for
determining the resolution of the incremental encoder.
2.4 Setting the speed of the learning travel
Specify the speed of the learning travel. Note that not every drive motor is designed for learning travels
at low speed (advised setting <<v-intermediate>>).
Attention: Select <<v-intermediate>> for the learning travel if switches S15A and / or S15B are present.
If the learning travel starts with <<v-fast>> (default setting) the lift may overtravel the terminal floors.
14.12.2007 IV / 5
MPK 400
2.5 Starting the learning travel

The learning travel is for precisely recording the positions of each zone in the shaft (S71 or S71 & S72). It
can be activated irrespective of the status of the lift car.
The learning travel consists of three phases:
Phase 1: Travel to the lowest zone if the lift is not already in the zone.
Phase 2: Upward travel to highest zone
The start of every zone is registered with the corresponding counter reading
(S71 or S71 & S72).
Phase 3: Downward travel to lowest zone
The start of every zone is registered with the corresponding counter reading
(S71 or S71 & S72).
The pulses from the incremental encoder and the travel height are used to calculate the encoder’s
resolution which is required for subsequent settings. In a first approximation, the DSC positions the floor
floor points in the middle of the recorded zones.
After the learning travel has been executed correctly, the message <<Lift ready to travel>> appears on the
lift status display.
If the learning travel has been aborted or its results are invalid, the message <<Blocked due to dig.
Selector>> appears on the lift status display. The cause of the error is stored in the event log.
The learning travel can be aborted by activating the test/normal switch (inspection). Errors not related to
DSC operation (e.g. a lock interruption, tacho fault) also cause the learning travel to be aborted. After an
abort, the learning travel cannot be continued, and must be reactivated from the menu.
Please note that learning travel will delete all the data from a previously carried out and valid learning
travel (from program version LIFT 4H 2.15).
A learning travel must always be activated after the positions of the zone magnets in the shaft have
been changed.
2.6 Setting the cut-off points for the various speeds

There are three types of slowdown distance <<v-fast off>>, <<v-intermediate off >> and <<v-slow off >>
(see chapter <<Appendix / position graph>>).
After the learning travel has been completed successfully, set the slowdown distances for the individual
speeds.
In general, excessively large values (in mm’s) for <<v-fast>> and <<v-intermediate>> lead to long levelling
distances.
Also large switch off values for <<v-slow>> lead to bad floor levels, such incorrect settings do not cause
the lift to produce an uncontrolled stop. But, excessively small values cause overtravels beyond the floor
level points and zones. In response to such faults an error will be displayed in the event log.
IV / 6 14.12.2007
MPK 400
It is advisable to set large slow down distances when commencing DSC installation.
When entering a slowdown distance, you specify a base value. This base value is identical to the
corresponding slowdown distances on all levels.
But, you can also set values for individual levels. This value is based on the corresponding base value and
is used for fine adjustment of the slowdown distances (see chapter <<Appendix / position graph>>).
Note that any change to the base value causes a change in the corresponding floor values.
The system MPK 400 supports up to 5 different driving speeds. In chapters 2, 3 and 4 become the driving
speeds (v0 - v5) with <<v-slow>>, <<v- intermediate>>, <<v-fast>> designated.
It exists the following connection:

Number of travel speeds:
1 2 3 4 5
<<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0)
<<v-fast>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1)
<<v-fast>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2)
<<v-fast>> (v3) <<v-intermed.>> (v3) <<v-intermed.>> (v3)
<<v-fast>> (v4) <<v-intermed.>> (v4)
<<v-fast>> (v5)
(<<v-slow>> = approach speed; <<v-intermed.>> = intermediate speed)
2.6.1 Cut-off point <<v-fast>>

The slowdown distance can be determined from the graph of the drive. The graph below is an example, it
shows the drive’s minimum braking distance according to the deceleration rate.
The base value of <<v-fast off>> is equal to the braking distance of <<v-fast>>!
14.12.2007 IV / 7
MPK 400
Example of determining the base value of <<v-fast off>> for a “variable freq. AC“ drive:
According to the graph below, the drive has a minimum braking distance of 1.2 m at <<v-fast>> = 1.0 m/s
and a deceleration of 0.8 m/s².
Braking distance Retardation

m 2
0.6 m/s
5.0
2
0.8 m/s
3.0 2
1.0 m/s
2
1.2 m/s
2.0
1.2
1.0
Speed V-fast
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 m/s
Diagram of the braking distance
The resulting base value for <<v-fast>> is:
Base value <<v-fast off>> = 1.2 m = 1200 mm
The diagram of the braking distance is valid only for the example!
The deceleration rate or retardation can often be guess work because most motors do not display
the rate of deceleration on the data plate, but for frequency drives such as the Thyssen MFC 16 or
the Ziehl-Abegg 2DF show the rates in the parameter settings in m/s². By using this setting you
can then set your slowdown distance!
2.6.2 Cut-off point <<v-intermediate>>

When entering the intermediate speed, proceed as in section 2.6.1. and enter the values.
2.6.3 Cut-off point <<v-slow>>

Enter the distance that the lift requires to come to a stop after its approach speed <<v-slow>> has been
deactivated. First select identical values for the upward and downward directions.
IV / 8 14.12.2007
MPK 400
2.6.4 Direct entry (reference point output)

Direct entry allows the lift to approach directly
Settings Settings
without constantly having to travel at the speed
Digital selector Digital selector <<v-slow>> (no crawling distance).
Distance ref. point Output ref. point
Note: The value of the function “cut-off point
From level mm YES <<v-slow>>” is not necessary.
The requirements for direct entry are:
1. a frequency-regulated drive
2. the regulator must be able to assess a reference point (check the manufacturer’s information).
You must also enter the value of the distance between the reference point and level (according to the
setting on the MPK) in the menu of the regulator.
2.7 Setting the min. distance for starting with <<v-fast>> or <<v-intermediate>>
Depending on the distance to be covered to the destination level, you can specify the most suitable speed
for the lift motion.
In doing this you are determining the distances required in order to be able to start the lift at fast speed or
at intermediate speed. Use the required braking distances and the acceleration rates given for each speed
for the distances.
With reference to the example below, the minimum distance for the lift to accelerate, travel at constant
speed, decelerate and stop comfortably is 2.8 meters. Therefore, the parameter value 2800mm is then
stored in start speed <<v-fast>> from as a reference for the calculation.
Example:
For the lift to start with <<v-fast>> and correctly process the selected slowing points, the following
calculation is made:
Acceleration distance : 1.2 m
+ Deceleration distance - 1.2 m (see example in 2.6.1.)
+ <<v-fast>> constant : 0.4 m
= Minimum distance of 2.8 m (2800 mm) between two levels
14.12.2007 IV / 9
MPK 400
For the lift to start with <<v-intermediate>> and correctly process the selected slowing points, the
following calculation is made:
Acceleration distance : 0.6 m
+ Deceleration distance : 0.6 m
+ <<v-intermediate>> const. : 0.2 m
= Minimum distance of 1.4 m (1400 mm) between two levels
Enter the calculated minimum distances to be covered in the menu:
Settings Settings
Start spd. v1 from Start spd. v2 from
1400 mm 2800 mm
Ensure that the <<Start spd v... from>> functions, i.e. the speeds not used, show the value
<<inactive>>.
2.8 Measuring the floor level difference

The DSC is designed to make it as easy as possible to make adjustments to levelling accuracy without
adjustments to the shaft magnets.
As described before the DSC sets the floor level in the middle of the measured zone (S71 or S71 & S72)
by default. It may then be necessary to change these base values to have correct stopping at each floor.
Drive to each floor in the upward and downward directions. Measure the floor level deviation and enter the
values separately for each direction of travel in the table provided in the appendix of this manual.
The following chart illustrates the relationship between the actual floor level points and the stopping points
for each direction.
cut-off point v slow downward
Stopping point during

downward approach
d
down
Actual flush position of the level
d
up

upward approach
cut-off point v slow upward
IV / 10 14.12.2007
MPK 400
The distances between the actual floor level points and stopping points are defined as dDOWN and dUP for
both directions. If the lift stops below the actual floor level point, the measured value is a minus sign. If the
lift stops above the actual floor level point, the measured value is a plus sign.
Example of correcting the floor level values:
Lift with 4 floors
The base switch off values for <<v-slow off up>> and <<v-slow off down>> is 20 mm from floor level
point
The following values of floor level difference have been measured:

Floor Downward approach: ddown Upward approach: dup
1 -5 mm (too low) -
2 +12 mm (too high) +2 mm (too high)
3 -10 mm (too low) -20 mm (too low)
4 - +8 mm (too high)
2.9 Enter the floor level difference

Enter the floor level difference values for every level und for direction up / down.
From the example chap. 2.8:

Digital selector Digital selector Digital selector
Fl.level difference Fl.level difference Fl.level difference
Fl. 1 down -5 mm Fl. 2 up 2 mm Fl. 2 down 12 mm
After completing all entries, check all these values again to ensure that the correction is performed
without any errors.
Mind the sign of your measured floor level differences.
2.10 Correction the floor level values
Press OK, the display then shows <<are you sure?>>, press OK and then the
Settings
system will recalculate the floor levels.
Digital selector
Fl. level correction
Set the lift “out of action” before you correct the floor level values!
14.12.2007 IV / 11
MPK 400
2.11 Setting the relevelling ranges

The relevelling function consists of mainly four settings, these are shown below. When the lift moves away
from the floor level due to loads moving in and out of the lift car the lift may require to relevel back to floor
level.
Enter the relevelling ranges for each direction. The set values apply to all levels (see diagram below).
The following chart shows the relevelling positions.
Zone
range Relevelling down on
Relevelling down off
Floor
level
Relevelling up off
Zone
Relevelling up on
range
Example of setting the activation and deactivation values for relevelling:
Relevelling is to be activated in the upward and downward directions 20 mm from the floor level point and
deactivated 10 mm from the floor level point.
Relevelling On Off
Downward 20 mm 10 mm
Upward 20 mm 10 mm
Settings Settings
Relevelling up on Relevelling up on
vs. fl. lev. 20 mm vs. fl. lev. 10 mm
Settings Settings
Relevelling down on Relevelling down on
Please note that the stopping accuracy in relation to the cutting in and/or cut-off positions for the
relevelling facility are dependent on the tolerances of the drive. For this reason, you should set the cut-
off positions close to the cutting in positions at the start of calibration. After each relevelling procedure,
adjust the cut-off position until the optimum value is reached.
IV / 12 14.12.2007
MPK 400
2.12 Activating the relevelling

Set the following menu item to "YES".
Settings
Relevelling
active
YES
2.13 Cecklists of the Commissioning

The following checklists supplement the documentation titled Commissioning the Digital Selector. They
assist mechanics on-site by providing additional information on commissioning.
2.13.1 Checklist for learning travels

Before beginning a learning travel, clarify the following points.
Are all the shaft signals required for the digital selector present?
<<correction->> switches Top and Bottom
At short floor distances in the end floors: the corresponding <<pre-limit->> switches Top and Bottom.
Zone
Do the zone, <<correction->> and <<pre-limit->> switches operate correctly?
Check the switching response using the test adapter function in the menu or with the help of an actual test
adapter.
Are the real floor level positions located in the individual zones?
The real floor level positions should be located in the middle of the individual zones.
Is the distance between the zones in the shaft sufficient?
The following relationship governs the minimum distance between two zones:
min. Zone spacing [m] = 0.05 s * v... (fast) [m/s]
Example: v... (fast) = 1.5 m/s
min. Zone spacing = 0.05 s * 1.5 m/s = 0.075 m
Are the zones in the shaft sufficiently long?
The following relationship governs the minimum length of zones:
min. Zone length [m] = (0.8 s * vSlow [m/s] + cut-off travel vSlow [m]) * 2
condition: min. zone length > 0.05 s * v... (fast) [m/s]
14.12.2007 IV / 13
MPK 400
Example: v... (fast) = 1.5 m/s, vSlow = 0.15 m/s; Cut-off travel for vSlow = 0.04 m
min. Zone length = (0.8 s * 0.15 m/s + 0.04 m)*2 = (0.012 m + 0.04 m)*2 = 0.104 m
condition: min. zone length > 0.05 s * 1.5 m/s = 0.075 m
min. zone length 0.104 m > 0.075 m
Are the zones of the end floors located in the respective <<correction->> switch areas?
Only the zone of the end floor must be located in the area of the corresponding <<correction->> switch.
Are the <<correction->> switches set so that the elevator is retarded correctly at the end floors?
The <<correction->> switches must be positioned so that the elevator does not travel beyond the floor level
positions at the end floors. However, the <<correction->> switches should not be positioned too far, as this
would make it impossible to fine-adjust the travel at the end floors.
Are the <<pre-limit->> switches at short floor distances in the end floors set so that the elevator
is retarded correctly at the end floors?
The <<pre-limit->> switches should be positioned so that the elevator does not travel beyond the floor level
positions at the end floors.
Are the incremental-encoder channels A and B connected correctly with the central unit?
If channels A and B are exchanged, the learning travel is aborted and the messages "No count signal" or
"Counter over run" are output. The shield of the incremental-encoder line must be connected with the PE
line on one side (shielding against interference).
Does the DSC (digital selector) board function properly?
If the error message "Card fault DSC modul", "DSC initialization" or " DSC connection" is present in the
event register after the MPK control has been switched on, it was not possible to establish a connection
with the DSC card. In this case, check whether the DSC card is fitted properly on the central unit. If the
fault still occurs after that, observe the service LED on the DSC card (s. chapter <<appendix / descprition
of the DSC LED´s>>). It should light up briefly during switch-on. If it stays lit continuously or does not
function at all, the DSC card needs to be replaced.
If a safety circuit is present, does it function correctly?
If a safety circuit is not present, is the corresponding input on the central unit (terminal 37)
connected firmly with terminal 200 (+24v)?
Has the correct transport height (total travel) been set in the menu?
A test value was set in the menu at the factory; this value need not be identical to the actual transport
height of the elevator. Readjust the value as required.
IV / 14 14.12.2007
MPK 400
Have you set the correct learning travel speed?
The learning travel should be performed at vSlow, provided that the drive is designed for this. Note that not
every multi-speed drive is designed for a slow learning travel and that such drives are in danger of
overheating at this speed.
Errors occurring during a learning travel are stored in the event register. A description of the errors can
be found in the documentation titled <<MPK 40 / 400 introduction>>.
2.13.2 Checklist for correcting floor level values

Observe the following points before correcting floor level values:
Note that the releveling is switched to the inactive state for measurements to correct the floor level
values.
Are the upward and downward cut-off values of v... (fast) and v... (intermediate) for each floor so that the
elevator has a constant vSlow in the zone?
For proper automatic <<correction->> of the cut-off values of v Slow, the elevator must have a constant vSlow
in the zone of the destination floor. If this is not the case, you must increase the cut-off value for v... (fast) and
v... (intermediate)
Are the upward and downward cut-off values of vSlow set for each floor so that they lie within the
respective zone?
For proper operation of the DSC and proper <<correction->> of the cut-off values of vSlow, these values
must lie within the respective zone. If this is not the case, you must decrease the cut-off value for vSlow or
increase the length of the zone.
Note that a new learning travel must be performed after the zone length has been changed.
Does the elevator fail to stop floor level with one or more levels even after <<correction->> of the
floor level and cut-off values for vSlow?
Have you entered the floor level <<correction->> values with the right sign?
If the elevator floors too high, the value must be positive.
If the elevator floors too low, the value must be negative.
Again check the conditions in the first two questions of this chapter. If these conditions have not been met,
perform the stated instructions.
Then repeat the procedure for correcting the floor level values. Record the non-floor level values on
every floor.
14.12.2007 IV / 15
MPK 400
2.13.3 Checklist for releveling settings

Are the values for releveling specified?
The values " releveling downward on" and " releveling upward on" determine the deviation point from the
floor level position at which the elevator commences releveling. The values " releveling downward off" and
" releveling upward off" determine the releveling cut-off point with respect to the floor level position.
Note that the stopping accuracy at the specified switch-on and cut-off positions of the releveling
depends on the tolerances of the drive. For this reason, you should locate the cut-off positions close to
the turn-on positions when performing initial settings. Correct the cut-off position after every releveling
process until the ideal value is attained.
Is the releveling function active?
Activate releveling via the menu (see chap. 2.12).
The questions in the checklists merely supplement and do not substitute the "Commissioning
the Digital Selector (DSC)"
3 Diagnostic
3.1 Function <<Stop position>>
The menue function gives out the actual value
Information Information
of the stop position and the value of the stop
DSK- Diagnostics Stop position position after the learning travel. Refering to the
Stop position Fl. 1 5.5 mm example stops the cabin in the 1. floor 1,5 mm
Actual 7.0 mm to high.
3.2 Function <<Resolution>>

The menue function gives out the resolution of the encoder system. It is the value of
Information
the last learning travel.
DSK-Diagnostics
Resolution
0,981 mm / Impuls
IV / 16 14.12.2007
MPK 400
3.3 Function <<Valid learn. travel>>, <<Act. learning travel>>

The functions save the values of the last valid
learning travel and the current learning travel. It
DSK-Diagnostics DSK-Diagnostics is a easy way to compare the fundamental
Valid learn. travel Act. learning travel values.
* *
The menue functions give out:

date und time of the last learning travel
type of the learning travel (automatic learning travel)
travel height
number of the floors
number of the lowest floor
result of the learning travel
number of the floor level positions
number of the zones
4 Level offset supervise

4.1 Function <<level offset tolerance>>
This function defines a tolerance range around the floor level position. If the car
Settings
stops outside of this range, it records the level offset and provides it for a statistical
Digital selector evaluation.
Lev. offset tolerance
4.2 Function <<level offset limit>>

Settings
stops outside of this range, it starts the action set in the <<lev. offset handling>>
Digital selector function. It also records the level offset and provides it for a statistical evaluation.
Lev. offset limit
4.3 Function <<level offset handling>>

This function sets the fault reaction to stopping outside of the tolerance range of the
Settings
<<lev. offset limit>> function.
Digital selector
Lev. offset handling
14.12.2007 IV / 17
MPK 400
5 Appendix
5.1 Position graph
V-fast V-intermediate
V-fast off down (initial value)

V-fast off down (level value)
V-intermediate off down (initial value)
Retardation V-fast
V-intermediate off down (level value)
Retard. V-intermed.
Zone range V-slow downward off (initial value)

V-slow downward off (level value)
floor level
V-slow upward off (level value)

Zone range V-slow upward off (initial value)
Retard. V-intermed.
Retardation V-fast V-intermediate off up (level value)

V-intermediate off up (initial value)
V-fast off up (level value)
V-fast off up (initial value)
IV / 18 14.12.2007
MPK 400
5.2 Configuration of the Digital Selector (DSC)
Travel high [cm]
Min. distances for starting v1 v2 v3 v4 v5

[mm]
Relevelling [mm] on off

downward
upward
slowing values [mm] v0 v1 v2 v3 v4 v5

downward
upward
Table for the correction of the floor level-values:
+ = Car stands too high [mm] = Car stands too low [mm]
Deviation [mm] Deviation [mm] Deviation [mm]

lev. down up lev. down up lev. down up
1 21 41
2 22 42
3 23 43
4 24 44
5 25 45
6 26 46
7 27 47
8 28 48
9 29 49
10 30 50
11 31 51
12 32 52
13 33 53
14 34 54
15 35 55
16 36 56
17 37
18 38
19 39
20 40
14.12.2007 IV / 19
MPK 400
5.3 DSC connection types
1. DSC connection using a protective circuit
(Safety module SM 01 - 001)
Increm. Safety module S71 S72

encoder SM 01-001 S71
S72
8 12 11
84 83 82 A1 E2
37 E3
36
DSC module
MPK 400: BST
Ter. DSC control Ter. ....

82 DSC zone E2 safety circuit
83 incrementer channel A E3 safety circuit zone
84 incrementer channel B A1 Relevelling on/delay
2. DSC connection without a protective circuit
Increm.
encoder
S71
S71
84 83 82 36
E3
DSC module
MPK 400: BST
Ter. DSC control Ter. ....

82 DSC zone E2 safety circuit
83 incrementer channel A E3 zone S71
84 incrementer channel B A1 relevelling on/delay
IV / 20 14.12.2007
MPK 400
5.4 Overview of the DSC module
Service-LED
EPROM
5.5 Description of the DSC LED´s

DSC pulses A and DSC pulses B: The LED´s display the pulses from the incremental encoder. One
or both Led´s may be lit at a stand still, depending on the position of the encoder. While the lift is
moving, the signals are switched so rapidly that the LED´s appear to be lit constantly. The individual
signals can only be distinguished briefly when starting and stopping. The LED´s are integrated in the
BST-print of the MPK 400 control.
DSC zone: The LED illuminates when the DSC zone (S71or S71 & S72) signal is supplied.
DSC status: The LED indicates communication between the MDSC and the inverter for a direct entry
(reference point output, BST-terminal 81).
Service LED: By removing the front cover of the MPK the DSC board is marked MDSC… .
If the board is functioning correctly, the LED flashes briefly when the control is switched on. If the
LED does not light up or remains constantly lit, a hardware error has occurred (e.g. no EPROM
present, incorrectly fitted EPROM or defective board).
The service LED is located on the DSC module. The LED´s "DSC status" and "DSC zone" are
integrated in the BST-front panel of the MPK 400 control.
14.12.2007 IV / 21
MPK 400
5.6 Selecting the incremental encoder and speed governor

A resolution of approx. 1mm is sufficient for floor level positioning. Improving the resolution (less than
0.5mm) does not result in more precise floor level positioning. Incremental encoders with resolutions
higher than 1.2mm are too imprecise for floor level positioning.
Speed supplied governor by BODE:
The incremental encoder is driven by a toothed belt with a transmission ratio of 1:4 (the axle of the
incremental encoder turns four times faster than the axle of the speed governor).
Speed governor Speed governor Trans. ratio Encoder Resolution Pulses

diameter circumference resolution [mm] per m
[mm] [mm] [pulses/rev.]
200 596.9 1:4 72 1.04 962
300 911.06 1:4 125 0.91 1099
Speed governor supplied by Jungblut:
The incremental encoder is mounted via a coupling to the shaft of the speed governor, resulting in a
transmission ratio of 1:1, or mounted via a tooth belt with a transmission ratio of 1:4.
Speed governor Speed governor Trans. ratio Encoder Resolution Pulses

diameter circumference resolution [mm] per m
[mm] [mm] [pulses/rev.]
200 596.9 1:1 500 0.6 1667
300 911.06 1:1 500 0.91 1099
200 596,9 1:4 72 1,04 962
300 911,06 1:4 125 0,91 1099
5.7 Notes on signal routing

A line length of 100m does not impair the signal quality for frequently used speeds, like 1m/s, 1.6m/s,
2.5m/s, 3m/s.
Any screened, 4-wire data cable can be used for connecting the incremental encoder with the DSC
terminal. The screen must be connected to the PE terminal.
IV / 22 14.12.2007
MPK 400
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning
System (APS)

KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 14.12.2007 / DO_ap4h_GB

MPK 400
Commissioning the Absolute Positioning System (APS)
Contents
1 Commissioning .............................................................................................................4
1.1 Preparatory work involved when using a control system with safety circuit...................... 4
1.2 Entering the travel height..................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Selecting of the learning travel / learning operation............................................................ 5
1.4 Automatic learning travel ..................................................................................................... 5
1.4.1 Checking the signal connections ...................................................................................... 5
1.4.2 Setting the learning travel speed ...................................................................................... 6
1.4.3 Starting the learning travel ............................................................................................... 6
1.5 Manual learning operation using the zone switches ........................................................... 7
1.5.2 Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 7
1.6 Manual learning operation with more than one levelposition in a zone .............................. 8
1.6.2 Procedure ....................................................................................................................... 9
1.7 Manual learning operation without using zone switches .................................................. 10
1.7.1 Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 10
1.8 Finalising work when using a control system with safety circuit...................................... 11
1.9 Setting the deceleration points for the various speeds..................................................... 11
1.9.1 Deceleration point for <<v-fast>> and <<v-intermediate>> .............................................. 12
1.9.2 Deceleration point for <<v-slow>> .................................................................................. 14
1.9.3 Direct entry (reference point output) ............................................................................... 14
1.10 Selecting the starting speed.............................................................................................. 14
1.11 Deceleration point for the inspection run.......................................................................... 16
1.12 Measuring the floor level difference .................................................................................. 17
1.13 Enter the floor level difference values............................................................................... 18
1.14 Correction the floor level values........................................................................................ 18
1.15 Setting the relevelling ranges............................................................................................ 18
1.16 Activating the relevelling ................................................................................................... 19
1.17 Setting area of level output................................................................................................ 19
2 Installing and replacing the absolute encoder...........................................................20
2.1 Function <<Encoder type>> ............................................................................................... 20
2.2 Function <<Install encoder>>............................................................................................. 20
2.3 Function <<Encoder adjustment>>.................................................................................... 21
3 Diagnostic....................................................................................................................21
3.1 Function <<Stop position>>............................................................................................... 21
3.2 Function <<Resolution>>................................................................................................... 21
3.3 Function <<Encoder / input lead>>.................................................................................... 22
3.4 Function <<Speed>> .......................................................................................................... 22
3.5 Function <<Accelaration and decelaration>> .................................................................... 22
V/2 14.12.2007
MPK 400
3.6 Function <<Measured breaking distance>> .......................................................................22

3.7 Function <<Zone list>> .......................................................................................................23
3.8 Function <<Valid learning travel>> / <<actual learning travel>>........................................23
4 Level offset supervise.................................................................................................24
4.1 Function <<level offset tolerance>> ...................................................................................24
4.2 Function <<level offset limit>> ...........................................................................................24
4.3 Function <<level offset handling>> ....................................................................................24
5 Appendix......................................................................................................................25
5.1 Position graph.....................................................................................................................25
5.2 Configuration of the Absolute Pos. System (APS) .............................................................26
14.12.2007 V/3
MPK 400
1 Commissioning
Please note that the APS already contains some data as a result of works tests (e.g. travel height used
for simulation). These values are not default values for the APS and they must be adjusted to suit the
conditions at the site in question.
Switch off the relevelling function for the entire duration of the commissioning
Settings
procedure. This will prevent relevelling being undertaken while discrepancies in
Relevelling level are being recorded.
Active
NO
Before you begin to set the APS, check:
the values for each of the basic settings (number of floor levels, type of drive, .... )
that the drive values in the main MPK menu <<Settings>> and those on the control mechanism match
as these are crucial in influencing the lift performance
that the absolute encoder and the MPK are connected (see circuit diagrams)
1.1 Preparatory work involved when using a control system with safety circuit
If trace information recorded during the learning travel or during learning operation
Settings
is incomplete, monitoring of the safety circuit should be switched off. This will
Safety circuit prevent the control system reacting to errors in the safety circuit.
Supervise
NO
During the learning travel or during manual learning operation, zone signal S72 must be available to the
MPK for calculation of the second zone signal, S71 (see circuit diagrams). Carry out the following steps to
do this:
1. Under <<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>>

check whether the <<Zone switch S72>> function has already been allocated to a freely
assignable input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an
input, continue with step 3, otherwise proceed from step 2.
2. Allocate the <<Zone switch S72>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net-
modules (for the procedure see the document entitled <<MPK 40 / 400 Instruction>>, chap.
<<free programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>).
3. Connect the freely assignable input <<Zone switch S72>> to the zone signal S72.
V/4 14.12.2007
MPK 400
1.2 Entering the travel height
Settings Enter the travel height (in cm!) as accurately as possible.
Absolute pos.-system The travel height is the distance between the access zone at the lowest level and
Travel height the access zone at the highest level.
cm
1.3 Selecting of the learning travel / learning operation
Yes With zoneswitch? No
Are more than one

levelposition in a zone Yes
area ?
(only MPK400 from prg. ver. 1.19)
No
With correctionswitches
No
(13A/13B)?
Yes
goto chap. 1.4 goto chap. 1.5 goto chap. 1.6 goto chap. 1.7
1.4 Automatic learning travel

Check the setting under <<Basic settings / Lift / Type of selector>>. The function
Basis settings
must show the value <<APS / autom. learn. travel>>. Where necessary change the
Lift value shown to <<APS / autom. learn. travel>>.
Type of selector
APS/autom. learn. trav.
1.4.1 Checking the signal connections

1. Has the <<Zone switch S72>> function been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST (see the
<<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>> menu)?
2. Has zone switch S72 been installed and has it been connected to the freely assignable input <<Zone
switch S72>>?
3. Have the <<correction->> switches S13A (top) and S13B (bottom) been installed and have they been
connected to the freely assignable inputs <<correction top>> and <<correction bottom>>?
4. When nearing the docking points at the terminal levels: Have the <<pre-limit->>switches (top) S15A
and/or (bottom) S15B been installed and have they been connected to the freely assignable inputs
<<pre-limit->>switch top and/or <<pre-limit->>switch bottom?
14.12.2007 V/5
MPK 400
Check the position of the <<correction->> switches and, when “short floor distance” is indicated at the
top/bottom flloors, check also the position of the <<pre-limit->> switches as these switches are used to
switch off fast speed during the learning travel. Where <<correction->> and <<pre-limit->> switch
signals have been reversed or are missing, check that the lift car moves beyond the terminal floors at
the pre-set learning travel speed or at the <<v-slow>> speed!
1.4.2 Setting the learning travel speed

Select the speed for the learning travel.
Settings
Absolute pos.-system
Learning trav. speed
Please note that not every drive motor is designed to carry out a learning travel at slow speed.
At the operation mode DCP 4 the learning travel speed is adjust to v-Insp. This value is not changeable.
1.4.3 Starting the learning travel

You can start the learning travel whatever the position of the lift car. To do so,
Settings
confirm the menu item <<Learning activated>> and the subsequent safety request
Absolute pos.-system by pressing “OK”.
Learning activated
The control system then automatically performs the learning travel.
Learning travel sequence:
1. Lift moves to the lowest zone provided the lift car is not already located in the lowest zonal range.
2. Learning travel up, whereby the start of each zone is recorded by the relevant count reading.
3. Learning travel down, whereby the start of each zone is recorded by the relevant count reading.
While the learning travel records information, the control system stores the positions of the zones.
Following the learning travel, the program sets the level positions at the centre of each zonal range.
Once all calculations and the data exchange between the MPK and the APS have been completed, the
message <<Lift ready to travel>> will appear in the usual display.
If errors are made during the learning travel or in the subsequent calculations, the message <<Blocked
due to APS>> will appear in the usual display. You can find the associated cause of the error documented
in the event log.
You can abort the learning travel by switching on inspection mode. In addition, any errors occuring
independently of the APS operation (e.g. locks are opened) will abort the learning travel. You must re-
start the learning travel (via the menu) following each aborted learning travel.
V/6 14.12.2007
MPK 400
Please note that learning travel will delete all the data from a previously carried out and valid learning
travel (from program version LIFT 4H 2.15).
If, following a valid learning travel, you make any changes to the positions of the zones in the shaft, you
must start a new learning travel.
On the successful completion of learning travel, continue with:
section 1.8 in the case of a control system which uses a safety circuit, otherwise section 1.9
1.5 Manual learning operation using the zone switches

Basis settings
must show the value <<APS / manu. learn. operat.>>. Where necessary change the
Lift value shown to <<APS / manu. learn. operat.>>.
Type of selector
APS/man. learn. operat

1. Has the <<Zone switch S72>> function been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net-
modules (see <<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>>
menu)?
switch S72>>?
1.5.2 Procedure
Carry out the following steps in turn:
1. Switch on electrical emergency operation or inspection mode.
2. Set the <<Settings / absolute Pos.-System / APS-Learn. operation>> function to <<YES>>.

(Notice: look at )
3. If the lift car is not located in the lowest zonal range, move the car into the lowest zone using the
electrical emergency operation or inspection module.
4. Using the electrical emergency operation or inspection module, move the car into the highest zone
5. Using the electrical emergency operation or inspection module, move the car into the lowest zone.
6. Set the <<Settings / absolute Pos.-System / APS-Learn. operation>> function to <<NO>>.

If learning operation has been switched on via the freely assignable input <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>>
+24v signal at the input.
7. Switch off electrical emergency operation or inspection mode.
8. On the successful completion of learning operation, continue with:
14.12.2007 V/7
MPK 400
As an alternative to using the settings in the menu, you can also activate learning operation via a freely
assignable input. To do this, carry out the following steps:
1. Under <<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>>, check

whether the <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable
input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue
with step 3, otherwise proceed from step 2.
2. Allocate the <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net-
modules (for the procedure see the document entitled <<MPK 40 / 400 Instruction>>, chap. <<free
programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>.
3. Connect the freely assignable input <<APS - Learn. Op. act.>> up to the +24v supply.
While the learning travel records information, the control system stores the positions of the zones.
Following the learning travel, the program sets the level positions at the centre of each zonal range.
in the event recorder.
Please note that manual learning operation will delete all the data from a previously carried out and
valid learning travel.
1.6 Manual learning operation with more than one levelposition in a zone
Basis settings
Type of selector

1. Has the <<Zone switch S72>> function been allocated to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net-
modules (see <<Information / BST-Termimnals-setup>> or <<Information / Net-Terminals-setup>>
menu)?
switch S72>>?
V/8 14.12.2007
MPK 400
1.6.2 Procedure

(Notice: look at )

whether the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable
input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue with
step 5, otherwise proceed from step 4.
4. Allocate the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net-
programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>).
5. Move the lift car into the level range of the 1. floor.
6. At the push of a button, transmit a +24v signal at the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> input. The ON-/OFF-
signal sets the level range. If you use the inspection control, you can set the level range with the up-
and down-pushbuttons of the inspection control. You have to press both buttons at the same time for
setting the level range. This function is available at MPK 400 from Liftprogram LIFT 4H 1.08.
7. Move the lift car into the level range of the next floor.
8. Carry out steps 6 and 7 for every floor in up-direction.
9. Move the lift car into the level range of the 1. floor.
12. On the successful completion of learning operation, continue with:

14.12.2007 V/9
MPK 400
in the event log.
1.7 Manual learning operation without using zone switches

Basis settings
Type of selector
Inspect it, that the inputs <<zone S71>> and <<zone S72>> are not connected to a 24VDC-signal!
1.7.1 Procedure

(Notice: look at )

whether the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> function has already been allocated to a freely assignable
input on the BST- or net- modules. If the function has already been allocated to an input, continue with
step 5, otherwise proceed from step 4.
4. Allocate the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> function to a freely assignable input on the BST- or net-
programmable terminals (BST / NET)>>).
5. Move the lift car into the level range of the next floor.
6. At the push of a button, transmit a +24v signal at the <<APS - Learn. Op. Level>> input. The ON-/OFF-
signal sets the level range. If you use the inspection control, you can set the level range with the up-
and down-pushbuttons of the inspection control. You have to press both buttons at the same time for
setting the level range. This function is available at MPK 400 from Liftprogram LIFT 4H 1.08.
7. Carry out steps 5 and 6 for every floor.

10. On the successful completion of learning operation, continue with: section 1.9
V / 10 14.12.2007
MPK 400

in the event log.
1.8 Finalising work when using a control system with safety circuit
Switch on monitoring of the safety circuit.
Settings
Safety circuit
Supervise
YES
Disconnect the freely assignable input <<Zone switch S72>> and the S72 zone signal.
Continue as per section 1.9.
1.9 Setting the deceleration points for the various speeds
The value of each deceleration point corresponds with the braking distance for each speed.
14.12.2007 V / 11
MPK 400
The MPK 400 system supports up to five different travel speeds (v1 – v5).
The following correlation exists for the speeds (v0, v1 - v5):
Number of travel speeds:

1 2 3 4 5
<<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0) <<v-slow>> (v0)
- <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1) <<v-intermed.>> (v1)
<<v-fast>> (v2) <<v-fast>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2) <<v-intermed.>> (v2)
<<v-fast>> (v3) <<v-intermed.>> (v3) <<v-intermed.>> (v3)
<<v-fast>> (v4) <<v-intermed.>> (v4)
<<v-fast>> (v5)
(<<v-slow>> = approach speed; <<v-intermed.>> = intermediate speed)
Fix the deceleration point by entering a basic value. The basic value for the associated speed and
direction is the same for all floor levels.
You can also adjust the deceleration distances separately for each floor by using a floor value (see
<<appendix / position graph>>).
The floor values for the speeds <<v-fast>> and <<v-intermediate>> are the same as the relevant basic
value in terms of their value. They should not usually be changed further. Likewise, the floor value for <<v-
slow>> is based on the associated basic value, but it is however re-calculated after any discrepancies in
level have been entered via the <<Correct level>> function.
Please note that a change in the basic value will alter all the associated floor values!
At the start of the APS installation procedure, select longer deceleration distances to prevent the level
positions being overshot. You can later change the deceleration distances at any time and make
adjustments to achieve the desired lift performance.
The number of available speeds results from the settings in the <<Start spd v... from>> functions. Read
the specifications given in section 1.10!
1.9.1 Deceleration point for <<v-fast>> and <<v-intermediate>>
Depending on the settings on the control mechanism, determine the braking distance from the diagram of
the drive. Enter this value in the menu.
Settings Settings
Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system
v... off up v... off down
Ensure that, looking in the direction of travel, the position of the <<correction->> or <<pre-limit->> switch*
is behind that of the deceleration point set for the speed <<v-fast>>. If this is not the case, the correction
or <<pre-limit->> switch will switch off fast speed.
* The <<correction->> or <<pre-limit->> switch are not necessary by APS, but you can install this switches
additional to the settings of APS. An <<pre-limit->> switch is necessary if the terminal floors shows “short
floor distance”.
V / 12 14.12.2007
MPK 400
Example
You are now going to determine the deceleration value for <<v-fast>> (v2).
The specifications for the controlled drive are: <<v-fast>> = 1.0 m/s; deceleration = 0.8 m/s²
Braking
distance Retardation
m 2
0.6 m/s
5.0
2
0.8 m/s
3.0 2
1.0 m/s
2
1.2 m/s
2.0
1.2
1.0
Speed v-fast
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 m/s
Diagram of the braking distance
From the diagram this results in a braking distance of: min. 1.2 m
Braking distance = deceleration value for <<v-fast>> = 1.2 m = 1200 mm
Enter the calculated deceleration values in the menu:
Settings Settings
v2 off up v2 off down
1200 mm 1200 mm
Remark: The diagram of the braking distance is valid only for the example!
14.12.2007 V / 13
MPK 400
1.9.2 Deceleration point for <<v-slow>>

Enter the distance required for the lift to come
Settings Settings
to a complete standstill once the v0 approach
Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system speed <<v-slow>> has been switched off.
v0 off up v0 off down
1.9.3 Direct entry (reference point output)

Direct entry allows the lift to approach directly without constantly having to travel at the speed <<v-slow>>
(no crawling distance).
The requirements for direct entry are:
1. a frequency-regulated drive
2. the regulator must be able to assess a reference point (check the manufacturer’s information).
The values <<at pos. v0>> and <<at pos. v-fast>> are available for the distance
Settings
between the reference point and the level position. The setting <<NO>> will switch
Absolute pos.-system off the reference point output.
output ref. point
You must also enter the value of the <<v0>> or <<v-fast>> deceleration point (according to the setting on
the MPK) in the menu of the regulator.
1.10 Selecting the starting speed

Depending on the distance to be covered to the destination level, you can specify the most suitable speed
for the lift motion.
In doing this you are determining the distances required in order to be able to start the lift at fast speed or
at intermediate speed. Use the required braking distances and the acceleration rates given for each speed
for the distances.
By entering the distance to be covered, you are determining:
1. the speed issued for the next lift motion
2. the number of travel speeds available, e.g. if only distances to v3 are entered, then three
travel speeds are available
V / 14 14.12.2007
MPK 400
Distance (W) in Additional Speeds No. of

the <<Start spd v... from>>* functions condition for the Available travel
v1 v2 v3 v4 v5 values (W) on the MPK speeds
(W2) 0<(W2) v0,v2 1
(W1) (W2) 0<(W1)<(W2) v0,v1,v2 2
(W1) (W2) (W3) 0<(W1)<(W2)<(W3) v0,v1,v2,v3 3
(W1) (W2) (W3) (W4) 0<(W1)<(W2)<(W3)<(W4) v0,v1,v2,v3,v4 4
(W1) (W2) (W3) (W4) (W5) 0<(W1)<(W2)<(W3)<(W4)<(W5) v0,v1,v2,v3,v4,v5 5
(Legend: 0<(W1)<(W2)<(W3) = W1 “greater than” 0, W2 “greater than” W1, W3 “greater than” W2; =inactive)
Example:
The following has been stipulated:
Floor distances: 3.5 m and 1.6 m
Two travel speeds (v1,v2)
From 1.8.1 <<v-fast>> (v2): 1.0 m/s, braking distance = acceleration distance = 1.2 m,
assuming <<v-intermediate>> (v1): 0.5 m/s, braking distance = acceleration distance = 0.6 m
In order for the lift to be started at the speed <<v-fast>> (v2), you can determine the minimum distance
from the following:
Acceleration distance: 1.2 m
+ Deceleration distance: 1.2 m
+ Distance at constant <<v-fast>> speed: 0.4 m (specified)
Minimum distance of 2.8 m (2800 mm)*

*between two levels
In order for the lift to be started at the speed <<v-intermediate>> (v1), you can determine the minimum
distance from the following:
Acceleration distance: 0.6 m
+ Deceleration distance: 0.6 m
+ Distance at constant <<v-intermediate>> speed: 0.2 m (specified)
Minimum distance of 1.4 m (1400 mm)*

*between two levels
Note: Going by the results in the example, the lift should always start at the slow speed for a floor distance
of less than 1.4 m.
14.12.2007 V / 15
MPK 400
Enter the calculated minimum distances to be covered in the menu:
Settings Settings
Start spd. v1 from Start spd. v2 from
1400 mm 2800 mm
Ensure that the <<Start spd v... from>> functions, i.e. the speeds not used, show the value
<<inactive>>.
1.11 Deceleration point for the inspection run
If <<correction->> or <<pre-limit->> switches are not used, the deceleration point for the inspection
speed must be specified in the menu.
Settings Deceleration points can be selected for the speeds:

Absolute pos.-system v0, v1, v2
vInsp. off at
When the control system indicates a special operational status such as:
invalid test run
APS not in operation
control system blocked by APS
the inspection run will no longer contain a pre-set deceleration point. This means that the lift car will travel
past the terminal level at the inspection speed.
If a deceleration point is necessary, set:
an <<correction->> or <<pre-limit->> switch, if the distance to be covered is inadequate in

terms of the <<correction->> switch
a zone at terminal level for stopping the lift car
V / 16 14.12.2007
MPK 400
1.12 Measuring the floor level difference

The APS is designed to make it as easy as possible to make adjustments to levelling accuracy without
adjustments to the shaft magnets.
As described before the APS sets the floor level in the middle of the measured zone (S71 or S71 & S72)
by default. It may then be necessary to change these base values to have correct stopping at each level.
Drive to each floor in the upward and downward directions. Measure the floor level deviation and enter the
values separately for each direction of travel in the table provided in the appendix of this manual.
The following chart illustrates the relationship between the actual floor level points and the stopping points
for each direction.
deceleration point v slow downward

downward approach
d
down
Actual flush position of the level
d
up

upward approach
deceleration point v slow upward
The distances between the actual floor level points and stopping points are defined as dDOWN and dUP for
both directions. If the lift stops below the actual floor level point, the measured value is a minus sign. If the
lift stops above the actual floor level point, the measured value is a plus sign.
Example of correcting the floor level values:
Lift with 4 floors
The following values of floor level difference have been measured:

Floor Downward approach: ddown Upward approach: dup
1 -5 mm (too low) -
2 +12 mm (too high) +2 mm (too high)
3 -10 mm (too low) -20 mm (too low)
4 - +8 mm (too high)
14.12.2007 V / 17
MPK 400
1.13 Enter the floor level difference values

Enter the floor level difference values for every level.
the floor level difference values form example chap. 1.12:

Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system Absolute pos.-system
Fl.level difference Fl.level difference Fl.level difference
Fl. 1 down -5 mm Fl. 2 up 2 mm Fl. 2 down 12 mm
After completing the entries:

Check all these values again to ensure that the correction is performed without any errors.
Mind the sign of your measured floor level differences.
1.14 Correction the floor level values

Press OK, the display then shows <<are you sure?>>, press OK and then the
Settings
system will recalculate the floor levels.
Absolute pos.-system
Fl. level-correction
1.15 Setting the relevelling ranges

The relevelling function consists of mainly four settings, these are shown below. When the lift moves away
from the floor level due to loads moving in and out of the lift car the lift may require to relevel back to floor
level.
Enter the relevelling ranges for each direction. The set values apply to all levels (see diagram below).
The following chart shows the relevelling positions.
Zone range Releveling down

on: 20 mm
Releveling down
off: 10 mm
Floor
level
Releveling up
off: 10 mm
Releveling up
Zone range
on: 20 mm
V / 18 14.12.2007
MPK 400
Example of setting the activation and deactivation values for relevelling:
Relevelling is to be activated in the upward and downward directions 20 mm from the floor level point and
deactivated 10 mm from the floor level point.
Settings Settings
Relevelling up on Relevelling up on
Settings Settings
Relevelling down on Relevelling down on
Please note that the stopping accuracy in relation to the cutting in and/or deceleration positions for the
relevelling facility are dependent on the tolerances of the drive. For this reason, you should set the
deceleration positions close to the cutting in positions at the start of calibration. After each relevelling
procedure, adjust the deceleration position until the optimum value is reached.
1.16 Activating the relevelling

Set the following menu item to <<YES>>.
Settings
Relevelling
Active
YES
1.17 Setting area of level output

This function sets the length of floor level range from 50 to a maximum of 250 mm
Settings and is used for triggering the <<level output>> and the <<level>> LED on the front
Absolute Pos. System plate.
area of level output

... mm
14.12.2007 V / 19
MPK 400
2 Installing and replacing the absolute encoder

The following values must be input into the control system for the initial commissioning of the absolute
encoder or after replacing it:
the resolution of the absolute encoder (see 2.1)
The following must also be taken into account:
has the installed absolute encoder been replaced by a new, structurally identical absolute
encoder? (see 2.2)
has the installed absolute encoder been maladjusted, e.g. have the belts on the pick-up system
been changed? (see 2.3)
2.1 Function <<Encoder type>>

Check the setting and adjust the resolution if necessary.
Settings
Absolute Pos.-system
Encoder type
2.2 Function <<Install encoder>>

After replacing structurally identical absolute encoder, the count of the new absolute encoder will differ
from value stored in the MPK. The functions <<Install encoder>> and <<Encoder adjustment>> can be
used to match the counts.
Procedure:
1. Install and connect up the new absolute encoder
2. Move the lift car to the lowest level with the aid of the inspection mode or electrical
emergency operation
3. Select the <<Install encoder>> function in the menu and confirm by pressing OK
Settings
Install encoder
The count on the absolute encoder now matches the old count, although there may be a very slight
deviation. The <<Encoder adjustment>> function is used to level out the remaining deviation (see 2.3).
V / 20 14.12.2007
MPK 400
2.3 Function <<Encoder adjustment>>

Slight deviations in the counts which occur following work on the measuring system
Settings
will mean that the lift will stop out-of-line on all levels. The amount by which the lift
Absolute Pos.-system will be out-of-line will be the same for all levels and for both directions of travel.
Encoder adjustment
Procedure:
1. Call the lift to any floor
2. Measure the discrepancy in level at this floor and make a note of it with the correct prefix*
3. Select the <<Encoder adjustment>> function in the menu
4. Enter the discrepancy in level with the correct prefix
5. Confirm your entry by pressing OK (the value will now be accepted)
6. Check the level at any floor
* a negative prefix is used when the lift car stops just below the level position, a positive one when the lift
car stops above the level position
Please note that the functions <<Install encoder>> and <<Encoder adjustment>> may only be
performed when structurally identical absolute encoder are replaced. If the absolute encoder types are
not structurally identical, a new learning travel must be carried out.
3 Diagnostic
3.1 Function <<Stop position>>
The menue function gives out the actual value
of the stop position and the value of the stop
APS-Diagnostics Stop position position after the learning travel. Refering to the
Stop position Fl. 1 5.5 mm example stops the cabin in the 1. floor 1,5 mm
Actual 7.0 mm to high.
3.2 Function <<Resolution>>

The menue function gives out the resolution of the encoder system after the last
Information
learning travel.
APS-Diagnostics
resolution
14.12.2007 V / 21
MPK 400
3.3 Function <<Encoder / input lead>>

The menue function gives out the actual status
of the measuring system. The reasons of
APS-Diagnostics APS-Diagnostics invalid values can be: defect encoder, defect
encoder / input lead encoder / input lead input lead or interchanged connections of the
Value valid Value invalid encoder.
3.4 Function <<Speed>>

The menue function gives out for the actual travel:
Information
- direction
APS-Diagnostics - speed
Speed [m/s] - max.value of speed
v: 1.23 vmax: 1.89
When the cabin stopped the value of vmax is the topspeed of the last travel.
3.5 Function <<Accelaration and decelaration>>
APS-Diagnostics APS-Diagnostics
Accelaration [m/s^2] Decelaration [m/s^2]
a: + 0.10 amax: +0.60 a: - 0.15 amax: -0.82
The menue function gives out for the actual travel:

- accelaration (plus sign)
- decelaration (minus sign)
- Topvalues
When the cabin stopped the value of amax is the top accelaration / decelaration of the last travel.
3.6 Function <<Measured breaking distance>>

The menue function gives out the braking distance and the measure tolerance of
Information
the braking distance.
APS-Diagnostics
Refering to the example the braking distance is between 7631 mm and 7679 mm.
measured break.dist
7655 mm 24 mm
V / 22 14.12.2007
MPK 400
3.7 Function <<Zone list>>

The menue function gives out all zone positions in form of a list. The differences of the ON- and OFF-
values are the hysteresis of the magnetic switches.
Information
APS-Diagnostics
zone list OK
Information
APS-Diagnostics
zone list upw.
Z[01] OFF 250.46 mm
Zone [01]
Information
APS-Diagnostics
zone list downw.
Z[01] ON 230.32 mm
Information
APS-Diagnostics
zone list
Z[01] TOP 20.14 mm
3.8 Function <<Valid learning travel>> / <<actual learning travel>>
APS-Diagnostics APS-Diagnostics
Valid learn. travel Actual learn. travel
The functions save the values of the last valid learning travel and the actual learning travel. It is a easy way
to compare the fundamental values.
The menue functions give out:
• date und time of the last learning travel
• type of the learning travel (automatic learning travel or manual learning operation)
• travel height
• number of the floors
• number of the lowest floor
• result of the learning travel
• number of the floor level positions
• number of the zones
14.12.2007 V / 23
MPK 400
4 Level offset supervise

4.1 Function <<level offset tolerance>>
Settings
stops outside of this range, it records the level offset and provides it for a statistical
Absolute Pos.-system evaluation.
Lev. offset tolerance
4.2 Function <<level offset limit>>

Settings
stops outside of this range, it starts the action set in the <<lev. offset handling>>
Absolute Pos.-system function. It also records the level offset and provides it for a statistical evaluation.
Lev. offset limit
4.3 Function <<level offset handling>>

This function sets the fault reaction to stopping outside of the tolerance range of the
Settings
<<lev. offset limit>> function.
Lev. offset handling
V / 24 14.12.2007
MPK 400
5 Appendix
5.1 Position graph
V-fast off down (initial value)

V-fast off down (level value)
V-intermediate off down (initial value)
Retardation V-fast
V-intermediate off down (level value)
Retard. V-intermed.
Zone range V-slow downward off (initial value)

V-slow downward off (level value)
floor level
V-slow upward off (level value)

Zone range V-slow upward off (initial value)
Retard. V-intermed.
Retardation V-fast V-intermediate off up (level value)

V-intermediate off up (initial value)
V-fast off up (level value)
V-fast off up (initial value)
14.12.2007 V / 25
MPK 400
5.2 Configuration of the Absolute Pos. System (APS)
Travel high [cm] (total travel)
v0 v1 v2 v3 v4 v5
Min. dist. for starting [mm]
on off
Relevelling down [mm]
Relevelling up [mm]
v0 v1 v2 v3 v4 v5
Deceleration points down
[mm]
Deceleration points up [mm]
Table for the correction of the floor level - values:
+ = Car stands too high [mm] = Car stands too low [mm]
Lev. Downw. [mm] Upw. [mm] Lev. Downw. [mm] Upw. [mm] Lev. Downw. [mm] Upw. [mm]
1 21 41
2 22 42
3 23 43
4 24 44
5 25 45
6 26 46
7 27 47
8 28 48
9 29 49
10 30 50
11 31 51
12 32 52
13 33 53
14 34 54
15 35 55
16 36 56
17 37
18 38
19 39
20 40
V / 26 14.12.2007

1 Event Log Entries PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 Event Log Entries PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MPK 40 / 400

 KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 28.11.2011 / DO_DBlatt4dh_GB

Kollmorgen Steuerungstechnik GmbH Kollmorgen Lift Controls Ltd.

KOLLMORGEN Steuerungstechnik GmbH Cologne, Germany / 04.06.2010 / DO_AN4DH_GB

1 Users guide to the display and menu structure

Function of the push buttons User guide of the display

- buttons are currently

new value : UP/Down- push buttons are active.

Attention!: The character "R" in the display shows you, that a

1.2 Structure of the Kollmorgen-Menu

Set <<Floor commission>> to Settings

Issue an internal call to the floor The acknowledgement light

Issue an external call from the floor The acknowledgement light

Now press the internal call button The acknowledgement

Perform steps 2 - 6 for each floor.

Set <<Floor commission>> to Settings

In these cases, the module is furnished with a location indicator by Kollmorgen

1.4 Access Management

The following codes are preset:

Level User Code no. Access rights

Code - No. Basic settings

Don´t forget it!

1 Push this buttons at the same time

1.5 Input-field for test calls

1.6 Free programmable terminals (BST / Net)

1.6.1 MPK 40 (BST)

Basic settings Handling:

Basic settings Basic settings

1.6.2 MPK 400 (BST)

BST - Input Handling:

Basic settings Basic settings Basic settings

BST - Functionset Handling:

1.6.3 MPK 40 (Net)

Net - Input Handling:

! ! ! : this setting is depended on

Basic settings Basic settings

1.6.4 MPK 400 (Net)

Net - Input Handling:

! ! ! ! : this setting is depended on

Basic settings Basic settings

1.6.5 Identification of the module-terminals ETG-B004 V3 (MPK 400) in the menu

2 LED – indicators on the front panel

U1 The control voltage is recognised.

Reversal functions door

The BST-modules of MPK 40 / 400 do not include all LED-indicators.

Information 2. Mo. 11.02.02

Handling: The event log stores faults and Two entry-types:

Abbreviation used in this chapter:

Notice: The first character of the entry is the sorting.

3.2 Function <<Operational status>>

Notice: The first character of the entry is the sorting.

3.3 Function <<Test module>>

Attention! Do not set output signals while the lift is in use!

Examp. BST 40 -I/O Inputs address 00 Outputs address 04

0 - = Terminal without function Terminal type: I = Input, O = Output, C = call (Inp./Outp.)

Examp. BST (MPK 400); A10 = Extension module No. 0

[1]: Either input or output!

3.3.1 Address-set-up BST-inputs

MPK 40 MPK 400

Addr. Bit voltage supervision voltage supervision

Addr. Bit safety circuit safety circuit

Addr. Bit free selectable inputs not available

Addr. Bit landing calls 1-8 free selectable inputs